Home

Merlin User Manual v.1.4

1. Packet A formatted unit of data carried over packet switched networks Port Address Related to NAT a feature of a network device that allows IP packets to be Translation routed to specific ports of devices communicating between public and private IP PAT networks POTS Plain old telephone system copper phone network infrastructure PSU Power Supply Unit QoS Quality of Priority given to different users or data flows across managed IP networks This Service generally requires a Service Level Agreement SLA with a Telco or ISP RTP A standardized packet format for sending audio and video data streams and ensures consistency in the delivery order of voice data packets SDP SDP defines the type of audio coding used within an RIP media stream It works with a number of other protocols to establishes a device s location determines its availability negotiates call features and participants and adjusts Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 8 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 session management features a bo is a common protocol which works with a myriad of other protocols to establish connections with other devices to prowde interoperability SLA Service Level Agreements SLAs a contractual agreement between an ISP and a customer defining expected performance levels over a network Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol a protocol used mostly in network management systems to monitor devices
2. Seren Sec ion a ISDN Tieline Session Data allows EE S V OS ISDN Tieline codec deterministic dialing and g sion Data routes ISDN call o ee E routing of ISDN calls e g the a audio stream WMI IOD codec sends info about the lt gt WHI ne ef _usingTieline e Tieline Codec Session Data enabled gp a edea pry A No codec ISDN Answer Config Settings required Program A Ls aie gc e Algorithm settings sent answering codec connection settings transferred via session data setting e Dial Route setting sent e Incoming session data configures Algorithm settings and the ait e Managed by Tieline codec Program i Dial Route setting Note Audio stream routing performed by remote codec Dial Route which is matched with corresponding Audio Stream Answer Route on answering codec 2 Tieline ISDN Studio Codec with Sessionless ISDN Gall eereaered Bot Hamre teeny ee Sessionless ISDN call made Module Answer Config Matching Dialer and routed to No Session Data Sent l pea by remote codec z x n answering p f Tieline studio codec receives Wu aE e codec program no info about how to manage audio stream via Sessionless call the incoming call e ISDN Answer Config on answering codec is ISDN Answer e No Algorithm settings sent configured with algorithm settings matching the Config settings e No Dial Route setting sent dialing codec e ISDN Answer Config has Answer Route configured Tieline ISDN Studio Code
3. e aa OK Cancel The following System and Audio alarms are available Alarm Explanation Type PSU Failure System _ Raises an alarm if one or both PSUs fail Alarm Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 158 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Chassis Fan Failure System Raises an alarm if the internal fan fails Temperature Too High System Raises an alarm if the temperature is too high Input Silence Audio Raises an alarm if input audio is lost according to oreconfigured silence detection threshold parameters AES Input Lost Audio Raises an alarm if the AES input signal is lost AES Reference Lost Audio Raises an alarm if the AES reference clock signal is lost Configuring an Alarm s Severity Level Codec alarms can be configured for three different severity levels 1 Click an alarm in the Alarm Type pane to highlight it 3 Perform this for each alarm you want to configure and then click Apply or OK to save settings Enabling Alarms To enable and disable alarms 1 Click the Enabled check box to toggle enabling and disabling of an alarm Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 159 Nena e PAs 2 Click Apply or OK to save settings Configuring Input Silence Detection Parameters When configuring an Input Silence alarm it is also necessary to configure the audio silence thresholds and timeout duration 1 Click Input Silence to highlight the alarm
4. Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 108 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 20 5 Configure Mono or Stereo Peer to Peer Programs in Merlin The Programs panel incorporates a wizard to configure a new program and all audio stream settings Before you configure a new codec program consider if e You want your codec to be capable of dialing and answering dialing only or answering only e A backup connection is required This section contains instructions for 1 Configuring Merlin Peer to Peer Programs Dialing 2 Configuring a Merlin Backup Connection or Auto Reconnect 3 Configuring Merlin to Answer Connections For more information about programs and audio streams within programs see the section titled About_Program_ Dialing Note The following connection setup instructions will display how to configure a dial and answer program with a backup connection If you want the codec to either dial or answer only select the option and the wizard will automatically display relevant screens to allow you to configure the codec correctly Configuring Merlin Peer to Peer Programs Dialing A Important Notes Before you start program configuration please note 7 e You cannot edit a program when it is currently loaded in the codec e You can lock _a loaded custom program in a codec to ensure the currently loaded program type cannot be unloaded by a codec dialing in with a different program type e Some drop down menus and settings may be greyed out intentional
5. For POTS settings are determined by POTS module answering settings For more details see Configuring POTS Answering 3 After configuring all settings there are 2 options i If you want to create another answering connection select the check box for Create another answering connection and continue through the wizard li Click Save Program to save the program at this point 4 After you save the program you can select the check box if you want to connect the program immediately then click Finish The newly created program will be displayed in the left pane within the Programs panel and in the Master panel Select and connect audio streams in a program using the Master panel or dial the program manually using the codec front panel Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 20 6 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 117 Configure 2 Mono Peer to Peer Answering Programs in Merlin It is possible to create two simultaneous mono peer to peer audio stream connections with different codecs This is similar to a Dual Mono profile in G3 Tieline codecs i Mix using Dfit Bidirectional Mono Pgm pons mono remote 1 ARR i 4 Bidirectional mono remote audio 1 UDP Audio UDP Audio Port 9000 Port 9000 UDP Audio UDP Audio Port 9010 Port 9010 The following program wizard procedure displays the configuration screens to create an answering connection for each incoming call See Configuring Merlin Point to Point Programs for more deta
6. Graphical User Interface Interrupted Foldback Interruptible Foldback an intercom circuit consisting of a mix minus program feed sent to talent which can be interrupted and replaced by a producer s or director s intercom microphone SDN ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ii Internet Service Providers ISPs are companies that offer customers access to the internet iP Internet Protocol used for sending data across packet switched networks Protocol used for Internet Protocol used for sending data across packet switched networks data across packet switched networks ca Ea Area Network a group of computers and associated devices sharing a common communications link mo Delay associated with IP networks and caused by algorithmic transport and buffering delays MIB A management information base MIB is a database used for managing the entities in a communications network This term is associated with the Simple Multicast Network Management Protocol SNMP Efficient one to many streaming of IP audio using multicast IP addressing Multi unicast A multi unicast program also known as multiple unicast can transmit a single audio stream with common connection settings to a number of different destinations MSN Multiple Subscriber Number for ISDN Network Address A system for forwarding data packets to different private IP network addresses Translation that reside behind a single public IP address NAT
7. or click to minimize back to the default panel size a Close bution Click to close the panel 8 Input Sliders Faders Input Sliders Faders Input gain control sliders faders gain control Input gain control sliders faders Analog AES3 Indication Indicates whether the codec input is configured for analog or digital audio sources 10 Input PPM meter Input PPM meter Input PPM meter meter Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 os Statistics Panel for Monitoring Connection Stability 0 om Program Cxn imtLoss 1m Empty 1mLate ImFEC 10 mLoss 10 m Empty 10 m Late 10 mMFEC Total Loss Total Empty Total Late Total FEC ___ Featue Description gt Z oZ oo o 1 Headings Headings for the various packet arrival statistics available 2 Connection Statistics Right click to view audio stream bit rate and jitter buffer Statistics 3 Maximize Minimize Click to maximize a panel to view it in full screen mode or click to minimize back to the default panel size 4 Close button Click to close the panel Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 ea Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Rules Panel for Creating Relay Activation Rules LL Cancel 1 Connect and disconnect aj Click to configure Connection and Disconnection by program when an input is toggling an input toggled 2 Connect when an input is Click to configure Connection and Disconnection switched ON
8. v e Default Answering Settings When a B channel is not associated with a Config it inherits the following default settings e Tieline Session e Unbonded e G 722 algorithm e Audio route None Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 o 20 3 Configuring POTS Two slots are available for inserting optional POTS modules into the codec These can be configured using the codec front panel or the Toolbox graphical user interface GUI See About POTS Modules for additional information on POTS You can use the web GUI to configure a dial and or answer program with POTS settings You may also need to 1 Configure POTS module settings 2 Configure POTS Answering settings 20 3 1 Configuring POTS Modules POTS settings in the Module menu determine how your codec will connect at a particular site You can copy similar programs between codecs installed at different locations and also configure site specific settings for how each module should connect The default Config settings for POTS modules are designed to suit Tieline codecs These settings will need to be adjusted to connect to non Tieline POTS codecs or connect in Analog Phone mode Configuring POTS G5 Modules 1 Open the web GUI and click the Settings symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel 2 Click the Modules button at the top of the Settings panel 3 Select Module 1 or Module 2 lt mmoame T 4 Click the drop
9. For sessionless calls for ali calis ISDN Answer Config Non Tieline ISDN Codec dials settings are used to with no Session Data connect audio stream a om ISDN Answer Config settings used to configure Sessioniess Algorithm Uses Algorithm and Studio Codec Routes both Dial Route info from Tieline Session and Tieline Codec Session Sessionless ISDN Calls Sessionoss Config Setings Data to connect audio TT Tieline Session stream Si SEn PAE gt S WWM Sm o Answer Route Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 98 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Allow Answering of Sessionless ISDN Calls Only Select Sessionless Only when answering ISDN calls from non Tieline codecs only When Sessionless Only is selected the codec will not wait to receive the Tieline session data This reduces the time taken to answer an inbound sessionless call The following image displays how the answering codec will respond with Sessionless Only selected i e calls from both Tieline and non Tieline codecs are always regarded as sessionless Remote Codec with ISDN dials with Tieline Studio Codec with ISDN i A P Session Data Enabled ISDN Module Answer Config Answers Calls using ISDN Module okt Pac C3 eo ZES z Tieline Session Ignore Tieline Session Data is enabled Answer Config Settings routed by matching FN TAO eg ISDN calls from all Tieline and non Answer Route settings Tieline codecs are treated as me a SS we ini Modul Non Tieli
10. Module 1 Module 2 Audio Rule POTS Codec POTS Codec ie phone input receives a mix of modem tone Monitor Modem Tone Monitor Modem Tone audio from both modules POTS Codec Analog Phone phone input receives analog phone input Monitor Modem Tone audio only and mutes modem tone monitoring Analog Phone Analog Phone ie phone input receives audio from the oldest active connection only ci Important Notes e Modem tone monitoring will work even if Phone Input Enable is Off via Settings gt Audio gt Phone Input gt Phone Input Enable Off e Modem tone monitoring is only enabled during the initial connection training and negotiation period in POTS Codec mode e The monitoring volume can be adjusted using the codec front panel via Settings gt Audio gt Phone Input gt Level or by opening the Inputs panel in the web GUI and adjusting the Phone input volume slider Country This displays the current country setting in the codec To adjust this setting select Settings gt System gt Country Configuring POTS Answering It is possible to store a different POTS Answer Config for each POTS module installed in the codec POTS answering can be configured to suit e The type of call being made e g Tieline with Tieline Session Data versus non Tieline Sessionless e Expected dialing behaviors and encoding e g whether audio streams use Route tags and which algorithm is used If you answer a call from a
11. R glement sur le brouillage radioelectrique du minist re des Communications Cet appareil num rique Tieline Merlin respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques visant les appareils numeriques de classe B prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique du ministere des Communications du Canada 22 11 FCC Compliance Statements FCC Part 15 Compliance TIELINE PTY LTD 25 Irvine Drive Malaga Western Australia 6090 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his her own expense Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Tieline Pty Ltd could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 222 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 lf this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try and c
12. e t is important that you enable serial port flow control within the codec Flow control regulates the flow of data through the serial port If disabled data will flow unregulated and some may be lost e Ensure you match the serial port baud rate to match the rate of the external device you are connecting to Ideally the settings on both codecs should match or you could have data overflow issues Only the dialing codec needs to be programmed to send RS2382 data Session data sent from the dialing codec will program all other compatible codecs non G3 when you connect Configuring TCP UDP Ports In TCP and UDP networks the codec port is the endpoint of your connection Software network ports are doorways for systems to communicate with each other For example several codecs in your studio may use the same public static IP address Unique port numbers can be used to route audio to each codec Tieline Codec Default Port Settings By default the codec uses a TCP session port to send session data and a UDP port to send audio The session port is programmed to use the TCP protocol because it is the most likely protocol to get through firewalls ensuring critical session data including dial connect and hang up data will be received reliably The default session and audio port settings in Tieline codecs for both TCP and UDP connections are outlined in the Installing the Codec at the Studio section of the manual This section also co
13. 2 Navigate to ISDN Answer Configs and press the button Answering ISOM Answer Contigs POTS Answer Contigs 3 Navigate to one of the four available Configs and press the button ISOM Answer Contas Config 1 Module 1 BisModule1 62 G 722 Tieline Codecs Config Module261 Module2 62 6 722 Tieline Codecs contas a dy 4 Navigate to Edit and press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 38 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ISOM Answer Conta i 5 Navigate to each B channel and press the button if you want to select deselect a B channel within the selected Config Navigate to Continue and press the button Notes The tick symbol confirms a B channel has been selected ISON Answer Contig 1 Choose 6 Channels Continue v v ci Important Note If a B channel has been selected within another Config it will not be visible Only available B channels are displayed 6 Choose the bonding method if multiple B channels have been selected then press the button ISOM Answer Confia 1 Choose Bonding Ootion tie Bond hust Bond 7 Select Disable when connecting to Tieline codecs using session data or select Enable if connecting to non Tieline codecs only then press the button ISOM Answer Config 1 Sessionless Only A Important Note Select Disable if the codec is expected to receive ISDN calls from Tieline codecs or both Tieline and non Tieline codecs i e you are not sure which type of codec may cal
14. 512kbps minimum 16bit 32kHz to 4 6 Mbps 24bit 96 kHz 24 kbps 16kbps minimum 16kbps 80kbps 80kbps 8 5 13 3kbps and music e Very low delay at low bit rates 64kbps minimum POTS phone quality audio e Very low delay at moderate bit rates Good quality 7kHz voice e Better quality than a standard POTS phone call e Very low delay at moderate bit rates 64kbps minimum 64kbps minimum voice and music delay at bit rates Recommended applications for on air use High quality voice Tieline Music 48 kbps Very high quality PLUS minimum voice and music Optimised e Very low delay for 64kbps at low to per audio moderate bit channel rates Low quality 3kHz Very high quality e Low to moderate moderate to high Extremely high quality uncompressed audio for STLs and audio distribution ideal for fiber or high bandw idth links Great for live voice or music remotes as w ell as STLs and audio distribution w ith limited connection bandw idth e g POTS or 3G w ireless Suitable w hen bidirectional communication betw een announcers is required Deliver 15kHz stereo over 1 x 64kbps ISDN B Channel Very high quality very low delay STLs and audio distribution Remote connections able to achieve 48kbps for each audio channel Suitable w hen bidirectional communication
15. Connection Timeout How do I determine which end is blocking data flow Tieline test codec firewalls have the default Tieline TCP and UDP ports open You can dial into these test codecs or other codecs you know are configured correctly from your recently configured studio and remote codecs and use the LQ readings to diagnose whether your studio or remote codec firewall is blocking your data packets If one codec connects ok and the other one doesn t then you will know which end is likely to be causing the problem As an example 1 Dial from site 1 to a Tieline test codec 2 Dial from site 2 to Tieline test codec If both of these connect successfully then the outbound TCP path for session data is OK and the inbound UDP audio path is OK 3 Dial to site 1 from a codec you know is configured correctly 4 Dial to site 2 from a codec you know is configured correctly lf either of these calls fail then TCP and or UDP inbound data is being blocked on the failed connection see Troubleshooting TCP Port Blocking above Testing your Codec e Visit http www tieline com Support Test lines for a list of test IP codec addresses you can use to verify your codec is configured correctly e See Testing IP Network Connections for more IP test information Learning More About IP Networks For more IP network information please see the section titled Understanding_IP Networks which discusses e Private versus public IP addresses
16. Important Note For assistance with configuration of IPv4 or IPv6 network connections contact your IT Administrator IPv4 versus IPv6 An IP address is a unique address to identify a device on a TCP IP network Your codec uses dual IP protocol stacks to allow your codec to work on both IPv4 and IPv6 networks Your Tieline codec supports both DHCP default IP addressing and static IP addresses for dialing IPv4 connection endpoints If you want to dial a codec with a public IP address you simply dial the IP address to connect If you want to dial a codec with a private IP address you need to perform network address translation NAT NAT allows a single device such as a broadband router to act as an agent between the public internet and a local private LAN Usually this will be set up at the studio end so you can dial into the studio from the remote codec Support for IPv6 connections allows you to use IPv6 infrastructure to connect to other codecs globally Configuring Ethernet Ports and VLANs The codec features two physical Ethernet port interfaces and up to four additional VLAN interfaces VLAN interfaces have features similar to physical Ethernet interfaces However your network administrator will need to configure VLAN support throughout your network for them to be supported in your codec As an example if only one physical Ethernet interface is available VLANs can be used to operate SmartStream PLUS or to separate codec Con
17. Merlin User Manual v 1 4 EGE Active codec alarms are indicated on the web GUI in the Current Alarms screen 20 22 1 Managing Alarms The user is alerted to active alarms by 1 The Alarm Symbol iY flashing in the top right hand corner of the Toolbox web GUI screen 2 All new alarms being listed in the Current Alarms tab within the Alarms Panel 3 Other alerts as per Alarm Dissemination settings 4 The codec front panel ALARM LED flashing red cP Important Note When a connection is active the front panel CONNECTED LED is illuminated solid green Illumination will cease if a connection is lost Acknowledging Alarms To acknowledge an alarm 1 Click to select the alarm in the Current Alarms tab 2 Click Acknowledge selected alarm After acknowledging the alarm 1 The State will change from Active to Acknowledged 2 The Alarm Symbol Ds will stop flashing but remain visible in the top right hand corner of the web GUI screen 3 The codec front panel ALARM LED will stop flashing and illuminate solid red 4 The state of other alerts may change as per Alarm Dissemination settings Alarm State Front Panel Alarm Web GUI Alarm Symbol LED Active Flashing red Flashing Acknowledged Solid red Stops flashing remains visible Deactivating Alarms An alarm is deactivated automatically when the alarm state is reversed E g if power is restored after a PSU Failure alarm or if audio is restored after an Input Silenc
18. Statistics listed for the last minute of network activity listed for the last minute of network Statistics listed for the last minute of network activity 6 10 minutes Statistics for the last 10 minutes of network activity A Important Note If the jitter buffer FEC or the connection bit rate is changed we recommend assessing a minute of recent connection performance in preference to 10 minutes of historical connection performance 10 minutes of data will include connection settings which may no longer be relevant Packet arrival history is cleared when you hang up a connection Following is a packet arrival analysis table with solutions for any noticeable packet loss statistics displayed on the screen Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Packet Displays Possible Causes Possible Solutions Analysis Packets sent and that failed to arrive Indicates how often the jitter buffer reservoir empties causing loss of audio The number of packets that arrive late and after audio play out Indicates the number of FEC repaired packets if FEC active e LAN WAN congestion Unreliable ISPs Unreliable networks Inferior IP hardware High number of packets being lost or arriving late Signal dropouts using cell phone networks Renegotiation causes the jitter buffer reservoir to empty Network congestion Jitter Buffer depth is too low Packets have been lost or c
19. a 4 Click Save Settings to save the new configuration Important Note e It is only possible to lock custom programs in a codec e f Lock Program is enabled and you load a new custom program in the codec Lock Program remains enabled and locks the most recently loaded custom program e A red Padlock symbol appears in the Status section of the Master panel to indicate a program is locked in the codec 20 19 Configuring IP Packet QoS The codec can be configured to tag IP data packets sent across a network by entering a value into the Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP field within the header of data packets transmitted over the network Configuring QoS _ 1 Open the web GUI and click the Settings ad symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel 2 Click the Options button at the top of the Settings panel 3 Click in the QoS text box and enter the new value ee SS een T g 5 f TA g K E CS p p g a er ar E Tal m S ii Aa ie GUII iljo ma e iT Network Ando SIP Modules TSON Answer Fu ii ra f SS SS A i 7 F ii i p i 4 mel 4 Click the Save Settings button to save the new setting Important Note Check with your IT administrator before changing this setting By default the codec is programmed for Assured Forwarding and more details about DSCP are Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 available on Wikipedia at http
20. a Connect to your router using a web browser b Navigate to hitp portforward com english applications port_forwarding Tieline G5 default htm Note when configuring a Commander or i Mix G3 codec at the studio use Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 192 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 http portforward com english applications port_forwarding Tieline G3 default htm c Click to select your router manufacturer from the list d Next click to select your router model from the list e Follow the instructions to complete port forwarding 6 Visit www portiorward com and download the port checking application to verify your router s ports are open 7 Configure the static IP address in your codec using the instructions in the next section To allow multiple codecs to share a single public static IP address behind a firewall and route the calls correctly your codecs and the firewall need to be configured similarly to the example diagram which follows Ensure the port IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway settings in your codecs match those configured in your router Remote codec 1 dials public 9022 and audio ports 9000 9010 and using TCP session port 9002 and Studio Codecs Configured with Uniqute 9020 are open in the router firewall UDP audio port 9000 Each codec is also allocated a static private IP address Static Private IP Addresses CP Session Port 9002 UDP Audio Port 9000 UDP Audio Port 9010 a UDP Au
21. being downloaded by the remote codec To ensure a stable connection try to maintain a reliable reading of 80 or higher for both the Send and Return LQ reading Important Note e The Return link quality reading is the same as the Local L setting displayed on a G3 codec e The Send link quality reading is the same as the Remote R setting displayed on a G3 codec Diagnosing Port Blocking via the Studio Codec LQ lf the studio codec Return LQ reading is 01 then incoming audio from the remote codec is being blocked by a firewall at either point A or B in the following diagram If the studio codec Send LQ reading is 01 then outgoing audio from the studio is being blocked by a firewall at either point C or D in the following diagram Studio Router Remote Router Firewall Firewall Studio Codec Remote Codec OTER soem T a app a amma ae IW S E E Ped gt gt Re ole a N7 n Diagnosing Port Blocking via the Remote Codec LQ If you attach your Tieline codec at the remote site to a LAN with access to the internet you can often dial and connect to the studio without any problem It is less likely that a firewall will block outgoing TCP and UDP ports However if there is a firewall at the remote site it may block incoming data packets from the studio The principle is the same at the remote codec for diagnosing blocked ports If the remote codec Return LQ reading is 01 then incoming audio from the studio codec is being
22. gt Bit rate t gt PCM Stereo Pi _ PLE apt X Mono _ Sample AAC Mono AAC Stereo wy G Qe Pe Qe ee geen eee e sees eeen ey m a gt x lt 2 oO e I m 3 gt AAC HE Stereo Sample r i AAC LD Stereo gt AAC ELD Mono gt AAC ELD Stereo See SSS SHS SRE EERE Gees Q nd g o 5 oO OS gt Opus Stereo gt Opus Voice Jitter r gt Auto Adapt r east Buffer 3 uter gt Fixed Buffer gt Best Compromise D ie UU a t FEC tt 33 Please note Codec default settings have square brackets around them i e Enabled 100 Direction Encode gt Encode Onl Decode Decode Only ee or i Audio Protocol UDP IP 2 Audio Port Auto r gt Disabled Via b Prima Seconda gt Important Notes e Depending on the session type selected in the codec not all options are displayed E g Session Type and Data are not displayed when configuring Sessionless IP connections e Default settings may also change depending on the session type selected e g Tieline Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 19 Session versus SIP or Sessionless ISDN Menu Navigation Select Connect gt ISDN to configure ISDN dialing settings using the codec front panel ISDN Setup t p
23. in the codec from which you are dialing This allows the SmartDAA to automatically adjust for the line voltage present in that country A Important Note It is possible to connect two concurrent POTS connections however the codec will not bond two POTS connections Connecting to G3 Codecs using POTS The codec will successfully connect to Tieline Commander G3 and i Mix G3 codecs over POTS These Tieline G3 codecs may use e POTS modules older superseded version e POTS G3 modules current version Connecting to POTS G3 Modules POTS G3 modules operate in the same way as POTS G5 modules when connecting e g they establish a link at the default bit rate of 28 8kbps and then renegotiate the link downwards to the highest possible bit rate where line quality is greater than 70 Connecting to Legacy POTS Modules in G3 Codecs These modules have slightly different characteristics when connecting When dialing from a POTS G5 module to these older POTS modules the codecs will attempt to connect initially at 19 2kbps If line quality is above 80 at this bit rate then the codec will retrain the connection up to a maximum of 28 800bps depending on modem handshaking The codec will then renegotiate the link downwards to the highest possible bit rate where line quality is greater than 70 How to Configure POTS G5 Codec Connections To configure the codec to dial using POTS for the first time Tieline Pty Ltd 2014
24. is the amount of time it takes for a packet of data to get from one point to another A jitter buffer is a temporary storage buffer used to capture incoming data packets It is used in packet based networks to ensure the continuity of audio streams by smoothing out packet arrival times during periods of network congestion Data packets travel independently and arrival times can vary greatly depending on network congestion and the type of network used i e LAN versus wireless networks The concept of jitter buffering is displayed visually in the following image Original Transmission Pett passetz patet RTP Stream with Jitter arrives 4 Packet 2 Packet 1 Packet 3 at the destination codec with I packets out of order and late Packet 1 Packet 2 a Codec reorders the packets and sends them to the decoder Audio Stream Playout Time Jitter buffer management is encompassed within Tieline s SmartStream IP technology which can e Remove duplicate packets e Re order packets if they arrive out of order e Repair the stream in the event of packet loss error concealment e Manage delay dynamically based on current network congestion e Manage forward error correction FEC Tieline codecs can be used to program either a fixed or automatic jitter buffer and the setting you Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 179 use depends on the IP network you are connecting over Over LANs WANs and wireless netwo
25. 4 dBu leaving the codec Audio peaks can safely reach 22 dBu without clipping providing 18dBu of headroom from the nominal Owu point Nominal 0vu 4dBu out gt Mono and Stereo Metering When connected with a mono program the codec will display a mix of inputs 1 and 2 on PPM1 PPM 3 displays the level of return audio Mix of Outputs 1 amp 2 Decoder 1 Mix of Inputs 1 amp 2 Encoder 1 When connecting with a stereo program the codec displays audio on PPM1 and 2 for inputs 1 and 2 and PPM 3 and 4 for the return audio Outputs 1 amp 2 Decoders 1 amp 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 Encoders 1 amp 2 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 23 2 x Mono Peer to Peer Connection Metering The codec is capable of creating two independent mono audio stream connections simultaneously In this situation the codec will display outgoing connection 1 audio on PPM1 for input 1 and use PPM 2 to display return audio Outgoing connection 2 audio will be displayed on PPMS for input 2 and PPM 4 displays the return audio Output 2 Decoder 2 Output 1 Decoder 1 Input 2 Encoder 2 Input Encoder 1 1 x Mono Peer to Peer IFB Metering This program transmits a bidirectional mono audio stream and a separate bidirectional mono IFB communications audio stream A mix of inputs 1 and 2 is displayed on PPM1 PPM 3 displays the level of return audio PPM5 and PPM6 display IFB audio in out
26. 5 Click Save Program to complete configuration After you save the program you can select the check box if you want to connect the program immediately then click Finish eo rer m ee OT PE ey ea F Ei ai i m B 6 The newly created program will be displayed in the left pane within the Programs panel and in the Master panel Select and connect audio streams in a program using the Master panel or dial the program manually using the codec front panel Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 133 20 8 Configure Mono or Stereo IFB Answering Programs This program is designed to allow Merlin and Merlin PLUS codecs to answer a call from an incoming codec and receive 1 A bidirectional mono or stereo audio stream connection 2 A separate bidirectional mono IFB audio stream for communications A remote Merlin or Merlin PLUS codec can dial into a studio Merlin or Merlin PLUS codec to create these audio stream connections Input Output and Audio Port Assignments for Remote Codec Input Output and 1 x Mono Stereo IFB Program at the Studio Audio Port Assignments UDP Audio UDP Audio nput Output remote audio 1 Port 9000 Port 9000 1 amp 2 Aux UDP Audio UDP Audio Aux Merlin IP Codec Bidirectional Input Output Port 9010 Port 9010 Input Output Bidirectional at Remote Site 1 Mono IFB 1 Mono IFB 1 Merlin codec at the studio connects to a remote Merlin codec Bidirectional stereo Bidirectional stereo remote aud
27. Contrast can also be adjusted by pressing the HOME button selecting Settings then System and using the down button to navigate to Contrast Stereo RTS Headphone Output The codec has a 6 35mm 1 4 RTS stereo HEADPHONE output for audio monitoring and this can also be switched to a balanced mono auxiliary line output The front panel HEADPHONE output and rear panel HP AUX OUT share the same hardware output This means both are switched and configured together l e both outputs are either a stereo headphone output default setting or a balanced mono auxiliary output USB 2 0 Host Port USB 2 0 host port which can be used for playback of backup audio files and firmware upgrades Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 15 7 Navigating Menus All main codec menus can be launched from the Home screen which includes Programs Features Codec Home Screen Elements 1 Screen Name The name of the current screen 2 Connect Select to connect and adjust connection settings 3 Cxns Displays the number of current connections and connection details 4 Programs View and edit Program configurations 5 Settings Select to configure codec settings Press the RETURN button to navigate backwards through menus or press the HOME button to return to the Home screen from any menu If a complete menu cannot be viewed on a single codec screen arrows on the right hand side of the screen indicat
28. Disconnect after different relay inputs are switched ON when another input is switched ON 3 Connect and Disconnect on Click to configure the codec to connect when audio Audio Detection is detected and disconnect when silence is detected 4 Synchronise a local relay Click to configure a local relay input to synchronise input with a remote relay with the state of a remote relay output output 5 Toggle a relay based on a Click to configure a relay to toggle based on connection s status connection status 6 Maximize Minimize Click to maximize a panel to view it in full screen mode or click to minimize back to the default panel size 7 Close button Click to close the Alarms panel Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 as Alarms Panel g C isi pe ee COOR w Configure alarms e Description ql Current Alarms Click to vew current device alarms A Alarm History Click to view the history of device alarms 3 Acknowledge Selected Click to acknowledge an alarm after activation Alarm 4 Alarm details pane Displays alarm details Alarm description pane Troubleshooting information to assist users when alarms occur 6 Maximize Minimize Click to maximize a panel to view it in full screen mode or click to minimize back to the default panel size 7 Close button Click to close the Alarms panel 8 Configure alarms Click to create or edit alarms Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 a6
29. Other relevant settings on the non Tieline codecFollowing are configuration instructions for dialing to several non Tieline codec brands over ISDN Connecting to APT Wordcast Equinox ISDN Configuring the WorldCast Equinox to Make an ISDN Call 1 Plug your ISDN line into the back of the codec and attach power 2 Press the Menu button on the codec to access the codec menus 3 Press the Menu button to select the USER menu Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 203 4 Select Primary Connection and press the Ent Dial button 5 Next select Codec ISDN gt Use Audio Profile No gt Eapt X16 or Eapt xX24 MPEG1 L2 or G 722 6 Select the appropriate bit rate and whether you are dialing in mono stereo or Joint Stereo and then the sample rate 7 For bonded MPEG1 L2 connections select CCS IMUX 8 Complete the profile setup The codec is now ready to dial or answer Configuring the Tieline Codec to Dial the Equinox over ISDN Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN Navigate to Setup and press the button ISOM Dial Setup N Connect Setup Tieline Codecs Music Mono 32k 64kbps Dest 1 Press OK to edit 3 Select Session Type Sessionless gt Select Dial Route None gt Number of B Channels Choose the number of B channels between 1 and 4 required for your connection gt Algorithm Choose G 722 E apt X Mono or Stereo MP2
30. Quick Dial number 14 Press 1 to select G 722 as the algorithm 15 Press 2 to select 64 as the bit rate 16 The codec is now programmed to dial Configuring the Tieline Codec to Connect to the Matrix over G 722 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN Navigate to Setup and press the button ISOM Dial Setup N Connect Setup Tieline Codecs Music hono 32k 64kbps Dest 1 Press OK to edit 3 Select Session Type Sessionless gt Select Dial Route None gt Number of B Channels Select 1B gt Algorithm Select G 722 4 Navigate to a Destination e g Dest 1 or Dest 2 and press the button to select it Then enter the number you want to dial and press the button then select which B channel will dial using that number and press the button 5 Navigate down to Auto Reconnect and press the button to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Note This is normally enabled on the dialing codec only ISOM Dial Setuo Press OK to edit T Save as Program 6 Navigate down to Save as Program and press the button to save these settings as a program 7 Navigate down to Module Configuration and press the button ISOM Dial Setup Auto Recon Disabled hodule Configurator 8 Select the ISDN module you want to configure and press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 21a Merlin User Manual v 1 4 tdodule Settinas todule 1 ISOM ST Sync Module SomM
31. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Open Source ISC style Licenses e bind o Copyright C 2004 2011 Internet Systems Consortium Inc ISC o Copyright C 1996 2003 Internet Software Consortium o Portions Copyright C 1996 2001 Nominum Inc Oo Portions Copyright C 1995 2000 by Network Associates Inc o Portions Copyright C 2002 Stichting NLnet Netherlands stichting nlnet nl o Dynamically Loadable Zones DLZ contributer Rob Butler o Portions Copyright c 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 227 O Portions Copyright c 1999 2000 by Nortel Networks Corporation O Portions Copyright C 2004 Nominet Ltd O Portions Copyright RSA Security Inc O Portions Copyright c 1996 David Mazieres lt dm uun org gt Copyright c 2008 Damien Miller lt djm openbsd org gt e expat o Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Thai O
32. The u law algorithm is used in the USA Japan and Canada whereas the A law algorithm is used in other countries 4 Navigate to Network and press the button Select the Network Type corresponding to the region in which you are using the codec then press the button ISOM Module 11 Network Type EU ETSI US MAT JPM MIT Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 36 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 US Nat If switch type is National ISDN 1 and 2 US AT amp T lf switch Type is AT amp T 5ESS EU ETSI If Switch Type is ETSI UK Europe Australia and most other countries JPN NTT If you are in the Japan and your network is NTT 5 Navigate to Line Type and press the button Ask your Telco whether your ISDN line is Point to Point or Point to Multipoint By default select Point to Multipoint unless your switch type is point to point your Telco says the line is point to point or you are connected to a PABX system Most PABX systems are point to point Next press the button ISOM tdodule i Line Type Point to Point Point to hdulti 6 If you are in the US enter DN and SPID numbers as required or in other regions enter DN or MSN numbers as required Navigate to each DN SPID or MSN and press the button before entering each number then press the button to store each number hodule 1 150th ST 8 Navigate up to Apply Settings and press the button to apply all module settings hodule i 150th ST Apply Settings V
33. Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 20 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 7 Use a dedicated DSL ADSL line for your codecs Do not share a link with PCs or company networks The only exception to this rule is if an organization has network equipment and engineers that can implement and manage quality of service QoS on its network 8 Use UDP as the preferred audio transport protocol 9 When using UDP ensure the total bit rate audio bit rate plus header bit rate is no more than 80 of the ISP connection rate IP headers require around 20 kbps in addition to the audio bit rate For example with a 64 kbps connection the audio bit rate should be 64 20 x 0 8 31 2 kbps or lower 10 Wireless IP connections can easily become congested and result in packet loss and audio drop outs It is very difficult to guarantee connection quality when there is no way of knowing how many people are sharing the same wireless connection A Important Note Be careful when using cell phone connections at special events NS where thousands of people have mobile phones This can result in poor quality connections and audio drop outs if cell phone base stations are overloaded IP Connection Checklist Complete the following check list and aim for a score of at least 8 out of 10 before going live R Usingarepuale Trt Stats parttintmetbacbone ine came SPs being wed T TheIsP Panis eBusiness Panoreauiaiot ineisPcomecton T A E E T _ EE ma 7 The ISP connection i
34. amp RS232 Data Programming Rules Default rules have been preprogrammed into the codec to facilitate programming the most common events required by broadcast engineers To view rules options Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 164 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 1 Click the Rules ued symbol at the top of the web GUI screen to open the Rules panel 2 Click Add New Rule 3 Click to select the appropriate programming rule for your requirements See the Web GUI Introduction section for explanations of the actions each rule can perform S S f Cancel l When rules have been configured previously they are displayed when the Rules panel is first opened Rule 1 Toggle a Control Port Input to Connect and Disconnect a Program This rule is used to connect and disconnect a selected program when a control port input is toggled 1 Click the first rule in the Rules panel 2 Click the drop down Input arrow and select the control port input which will trigger program connection and disconnection 3 Click the drop down Program arrow to select the program to be connected Create fue Cancel 4 Check the Rule Summary and click Create Rule to save the settings Rule 2 Switch Different Control Port Inputs On to Connect and Disconnect a Program This rule is used to connect and disconnect a selected program when different codec control port inputs are turned on 1 Click the second rule in the Rules panel 2
35. en wikipedia org wiki Dscp 20 20 Configuring SNMP in the Codec The codec supports Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP for managing devices on IP networks There are two elements to configuring SNMP in your codec 1 Configure SNMP Device settings in your codec 2 Configure SNMP Traps wa the Alarms Panel in the web GUI see SNMP_ITrap Configuration in Configuring Alarms or to configure using the codec front panel see Configuring SNMP Settings Description of SNMP Settings in the Codec Features Operation Button Descriptions Codec Name A user specified alohanumeric identifier which may be used by third party SNMP software to identify a device The device name corresponds to the 1S0 org dod internet mgmt mib 2 system sysName SNMP attribute and is completely independent of DNS NIS WINS or other device naming and identification schemes though convention is to use the device s fully qualified domain name A user specified alphanumeric string which may be used by third party SNMP software to identify a device Dewce location corresponds to the ISO org dod internet mgmt mib 2 system sysLocation SNMP attribute Contact A text identifier for the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person R O Community SNMP provides two types of access namely Read Only access and Read Write access The R O Community identifier allows Read Only level access
36. is included in the user manual This can be downloaded from the Help Panel in the Web Browser Interface or from the Tieline website lt http tieline com gt You may request a copy for the open source software on DVD by contacting our support team on 61 0 8 9249 6688 Tieline Pty Ltd will charge a small handling fee for distribution of this software Some of the open source software of this product is based on the works of the Gentoo project and is not directed managed sold or supported by Gentoo Foundation Inc The Gentoo name is a trademark of Gentoo Foundation Inc Open Source GPL compatible Licenses o Some of the open source software in the product is licensed under GPL version 3 A copy of the license can be obtained at http www gnu org licenses gpl html o Some of the open source software in the product is licensed under GPL version 2 A copy of the license can be obtained at http www gnu org licenses old licenses gpl 2 0 html o Some of the open source software in the product is licensed under LGPL version 3 A copy of the license can be obtained at http www gnu org licenses lgpl html o Some of the open source software in the product is licensed under LGPL version 2 1 A copy of the license can be obtained at http www gnu org licenses old licenses lgpl 2 1 html Open Source BSD style Licenses e bind o Portions Copyright c 1987 1990 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reser
37. sT Ssenc ci Important Note ISDN Sync should be displayed when an ISDN line is connected to the codec This appears regardless of whether you have configured the ISDN Line Type correctly 9 Configure the following settings e Accept gt Voice and Data e Network gt Check with your Telco EU ETSI in Australia Europe amp most countries outside North America US Nat is the most common in the US but check with your Telco e Line Type gt Check with your Telco and select either Point to Multi point to multipoint or Point to Point point to point e DN MSN gt Enter the SPID and DN numbers if required in your region e g a SPID is normally required in the US 10 Navigate up to Apply Settings and press the button Dialing from the Tieline Codec Program Dialing 1 If you have saved the ISDN program as previously instructed press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt Programs 2 Select the saved program you want to load and press the button 3 Select Load and press the button to load the program 4 Press the CONNECT button to dial the ISDN program connections Ad Hoc Dialing 1 If you haven t save the program but have entered the dialing numbers and other settings press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN gt Connect 2 Press the button to dial using the settings previously entered Dialing from the Comrex Matrix LE
38. the incoming mono stream will be mixed to both the left and right outputs at the studio Some drop down menus and settings may be greyed out intentionally depending on features available and the transport selected e g IP or ISDN It is possible to save a program at several points throughout the program wizard and use default settings to save configuration time Failover and SmartStream PLUS redundant streaming are not available with SIP or sessionless IP connections e POTS is not supported for stereo audio stream connections To learn more about programs see the section titled About Program Dialing 1 Open the web GUI and click the Programs symbol at the top of the screen to display the Programs panel 2 Click the New Program button to open the wizard and e Click in the text box to name the new program e Select Mono Stereo Peer to Peer IFB or if you want to use an existing program as a template select this option Then click Next Fp Pogam f Create a New Program Important Notes When you decide to use an existing program as a template the new program inherits all the settings of the template program and you can adjust these settings as required by continuing through the program wizard 3 Enter the Audio Stream name and select Answer only Then click Next Note If the codec you are configuring needs to dial connections as well as answer you can select Dial or answer and configure both dialing and answering
39. 3 on the numeric KEYPAD for lower bit rates press then 9 18 2 Monitoring IP Connections Connection Details The number of active audio streams and connections is displayed on the Home screen via Cxns In the following image two connections left bracketed number and two audio streams right bracketed number are currently in use Home hiy Program 2 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen 2 Use the navigation buttons to select Cxns and press the button 3 If only a single IP audio stream is connected the Connected IP screen displays details of the active connection When multiple audio streams are connected navigate to the one you want to view in the Connections screen and press the button to vew more details For IP connections you can view the IP address dialed and the LQ link quality on the screen Use the down Ww navigation button to view the algorithm being used the connection bit rate total bytes used and the amount of jitter buffer delay over the IP network Connected IP 2 of 31 01 09 52 DlA L Send 59 Retuen 39 sh Link Quality LQ Readings Send and return LQ numbers can also help to determine if a problem is occurring at either end of a connection For example on an IP connection the Return reading represents the audio being downloaded from the network locally i e audio data is being sent by the remote codec Conversely the Send link quality reading represents the audio data being
40. ETH1 IP sub or Aux Ba nee eeoeee gt DHCP Defaults WO ings i ge c Analog p lt 8 Lor Clear Q fe lt D mans IPv4 Mode i gm toca gt a Calls IPv6 RS232 gt Manual Auto Recover ainas ae Reboot gt Enabled Clear gt Aux Input Enable Logs Lock Disabled Be i gt tere ey r gt Phone Input Enable rmL__Level Please note Codec default i IGC settings have square brackets Build around them i e Enabled Output Follow Input Type S N serial zs FESS umber bee gt Locked to AES3 Input Wordclock Sync In Teme Ret gt Treine 65 gt Tieline G3 pa gt ao A Program Default gt _Input__ Y gt Decoder Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 22 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 8 Merlin Input Levels and PPMs A Important Note e Input levels can only be adjusted on analog inputs Digital AES3 source audio is not adjustable See Configuring AES3 input audio for more information about digital in outs Input audio functions can also be configured using the Toolbox web GUI See Configuring Input Output Settings Audio Levels and Meters The PPM meters use dBu to express nominal operating headroom and noise floor levels Set audio levels so that audio peaks average at the nominal Ovu point indicated on the front panel PPM meters This represents a program level of
41. If this is not displayed check your connections and settings to make sure they are correct Configuring the Tieline Codec to Dial the Xstream over ISDN 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN 2 Navigate to Setup and press the button ISOM Dial Setup Connect Setup Tieline Codecs Music hono 32k 64kbps Dest 1 Press OK to edit Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 211 3 Select Session Type Sessionless gt Select Dial Route None gt Number of B Channels Choose 1B or 2B gt Algorithm Choose G 722 MP2 Mono or MP2 Stereo Note select 48kHz sample rate for MP2 4 Navigate to a Destination e g Dest 1 or Dest 2 and press the button to select each one in turn Enter the number for each B channel you want to dial and press the button then select which B channel will dial using that number and press the button 5 Navigate down to Auto Reconnect and press the button to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Note This is normally enabled on the dialing codec only ISON Dial Setup Press OK to edit a Save as Program 6 Navigate down to Save as Program and press the button to save these settings as a program 7 Navigate down to Module Configuration and press the button ISOM Dial Setuo Auto Recon Disabled A hiodule Configuration 8 Select the ISDN module you want to configure and press the button Wodule Setinas toduyle 1 ISDN 5
42. Important Note Configure ISDN Answer Config settings in the codec before attempting to dial from the Comrex Matrix to the Tieline codec Select the following settings in the Tieline codec in one of the Configs see ISDN Answering Configuration for more detail e May bond e Sessionless e G 722 Algorithm 1 Use the Cancel button to return to the main LCD connection screen 2 Press Enter then press 1 Dial and use the numeric keypad to enter the number you wish to dial 3 Press Enter to make the call Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 215 p oe gt ars A ay Faget ri ss c Screen when Connected Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 216 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 22 8 Using Answer Routes for Sessionless ISDN Calls Tieline Genie Distribution and Merlin PLUS audio codecs support multiple connections using a variety of connection transports such as IP ISDN and POTS Tieline codecs support using Tieline session data which assists with configuration and routing of multiple incoming calls to these codecs In addition audio ports can be used to successfully route IP calls to your preferred codec inputs outputs If you are accepting calls from multiple non Tieline ISDN codecs then you will be making sessionless connections which require the codecs at both ends to be configured with the same connection settings In addition you can use Answer Routes and site specific mod
43. Merlin Backup Options Tieline codecs feature highly advanced backup and redundancy options to maintain reliable audio codec streaming These include the options outlined in the following table Tieline Audio Codec Backup Required How to Enable Transport IP ISDN or POTS IP Only Note concurrent packet stream sent codec detects IP packet loss or delayed packets All transports Note codec detects loss of data or connection and redials the backup connection Backup Option SmartStream PLUS On demand cold Failover FEC Forward Error Correction Auto Reconnect IP Only Note decoding codec detects IP packet loss or delayed packets All transports codec will redial continuously to try and reconnect Features Time Respond No time Simultaneous redundant streaming delay dual User detection configurable parameters during program configuration Delay is equal to detection time plus the time required to dial the alternative connection No time delay packet replacement occurs in real time Immediately redials after loss of IP stream detected Enabled in dialing codec program configures local decoding or remote decoding via session data Dialing codec program monitors streaming and manages failover Dialing codec configures local and remote FEC settings via session data transfer when connecting Enabled in dialing codec program Note POTS can take up t
44. Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Click Save Settings to store all configuration settings D Note The Subnet Mask is used by the TCP IP protocol to determine whether a host is on the local subnet or on a remote network The default Gateway is the router linking the codec s subnet to other networks See your IT administrator for more details IPv6 Address Configuration An IPv6 address is represented by 8 groups of 16 bit hexadecimal values separated by colons The drop down Configure IPv6 menu provides three address configuration options 1 Auto An address is automatically assigned to the codec when you connect the codec to an IPv6 router This process is similar to how an IPv4 DHCP address is assigned 2 Manual Select to enter static IPv6 address details 3 Off Select to ignore IPv6 address details D Important Note Select Off in the drop down Configure IPv6 menu if you are not using IPv6 to connect to another device This ensures your codec will attempt to connect using IPv4 at all times Types of IPv6 Addresses There are two types of addresses displayed in the IPv6 section 1 IPv6 address normally global A router allocated IP address with global visibility details of which are displayed in the Address Prefix and Gateway text boxes 2 Link Local Address A local address which can only be used to connect to another device directly over a LAN This address is allocated by the codec internally based on MAC address de
45. Merlin User Manual v 1 4 oat 13 1 1 Ensure that the correct country setting is configured in your codec wa Settings gt System gt Country This ensures the correct settings are used by the codec when making POTS connections 2 When dialing between two Tieline codecs you normally only need to configure a POTS dialing program via Connect gt POTS Other more advanced settings can also be configured 1 Select Settings gt Modules gt Select POTS Module to adjust POTS module settings specific to your codec site See Configure POTS Module Settings for more information see Configuring POTS Modules to adjust settings using the Toolbox web GUI 2 If you are connecting to non Tieline codecs you may need to create an answering Config via Settings gt Answering gt POTS Answer Configs gt Select POTS Config which will determine the module used and relevant settings for answering a non Tieline POTS call See Configure POTS Module Answering for more information see Configuring POTS Answering to adjust settings using the Toolbox web GUI Important Note The codec has a single analog phone input shared by both modules default setting is Off This phone input is used to monitor modem tones in POTS Codec mode and for receiving audio in Analog Phone mode Phone Input settings can be adjusted via Settings gt Audio gt Phone Input W Making Analog Phone Voice Calls All POTS G5 modules are capable of making analog voice
46. OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Open Source OpenSSL License e Openssl o This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 228 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org o This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com Copyright c 1998 2011 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
47. Peer SIP IP Connections SIP can be used to make direct peer to peer calls to different brands of IP codecs with public IP addresses or between two codecs over a LAN which do not pass through firewalls Peer to peer SIP calls are usually used to connect to other brands of codecs and perform call and session management tasks Peer to peer SIP calls between two codecs are detected automatically and require no special pre programming To make a peer to peer call between codecs we recommend both codecs use public IP addresses Find out the IP address of the remote codec being dialed Program each codec with a compatible algorithm and sample rate etc Dial using SIP within the Connect menu If the remote codec has a private IP address then it should be configured for port forwarding and should dial the public IP address at the studio see Programming TCP UDP Protocols for more details on port forwarding 1 To dial peer to peer press the HOME button to return to the Home screen select Connect gt IP gt SIP 2 Use the numeric KEYPAD to enter the IP address of the codec you want to dial using the or buttons to enter the periods in the IP address and use the RETURN button to delete numbers already entered 3 Then press the down W navigation button to select Setup and press 4 to adjust the algorithm jitter buffer and encode decode direction if required Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 6s 4 Press the RETURN but
48. Po TT Port Sasson Por TE Port oie aoe ae T TE Port Audio Port Fy sessen Port 9002 9000 Sess 9002 9000 i Season Pore 9002 Ea 1 9000 IP2 Session IP2 Audio Port Web GUI 80 SIP Session Alternative Audio Port Port 9012 9010 5060 Session 9012 Mme 2 9010 Toolbox Toolbox Alternative SIP Audio Web GUI 80 Audio Port a 5550 Software 5550 Session 9012 5004 E 3 9020 SIP Session Alternative Alternative Audio Port 5060 Web GUI 8080 inn 8080 Ea 4 9030 SIP Audio Audio Port 5004 Loe 5 9040 Audio Port Mr 6 9050 SIP Session 5060 SIP Audio 5004 5006 5008 5010 5012 5014 Configuring a Static Public or Private IP Address in Genie Merlin and Bridge IT v 2 x firmware Codecs To enter a static IP Address into the codec for NAT Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons to select Settings and press ox Use the down navigation button to select LAN and press Select Eth1 and navigate to IPv4 mode and press ox A U N ETH1 Cona i Primar IPu Mode falsia F VE td a g p lj to 1 Auto OMS 5 DHCP is enabled by default Select Static and press or Select ETH1 IP 4 Mode 6 The Static IP address menu is revealed after DHCP is disabled Use the navigation buttons to select IPv4 Static IP and press ox ETH1 Confia Pramarei POU 427 0 0 4 rut Subne 255 255 2550 jy Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 194 Merlin User Man
49. Programs list and will be overwritten after several calls have been made Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 49 Configure IP settings including IP address Posen configuration settings are stored and can be edited only via the Toolbox wet GUI g details via Connect gt IP SIP Press Connect to view the Recent Programs screen and select a recent Program to redial E Peer to peer connection configured via the codec front panel 16 Multiple Stream Programs Programs can be configured to connect a single audio stream to multiple destinations or connect multiple audio streams to different destinations 2 x Mono Peer to Peer Programs A 2 x Mono Peer to Peer program includes two mono audio streams Each audio stream includes a separate peer to peer connection to a different destination which can also be configured with different transport audio and backup settings 17 Mono or Stereo IFB Programs This program is designed to allow Merlin and Merlin PLUS codecs to answer a call from an incoming codec and receive 1 A bidirectional mono or stereo audio stream connection 2 A separate bidirectional mono IFB audio stream for communications 1 x Mono or Stereo Peer to Peer IFB via Merlin or Merlin PLUS Bidirectional mono or stereo audio Bidirectional mono IFB Merlin IP Codec at the Studio Merlin IP Codec at the Remote Site 18 Getting Connected Quickly B
50. Pti Alg husie Stereo 32k 64 kbps JitBut Fined 100 ms FEC Loc Off Rem Oft 7 Press the down Ww navigation button to select FEC forward error correction and press for to view selection options Use the navigation buttons to choose the FEC percentage you want to use and press for IF Config fPt to Pti husic Stereo 32k 64 kbps Fined 100 ms 8 When configuration is complete press the RETURN button to navigate backwards to the Connect IP screen that the IP address was entered into Important Note At this point you can navigate to Save on the Connect IP screen and press to use the numeric KEYPAD to name the program and press 4 to save the program w 9 Press the CONNECT button to make a connection The Wait Connecting screen appears during the connection process Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 52 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 10 Alternatively to load a saved program and dial press the HOME button navigate to Programs select the program you want to dial and press the CONNECT button to load the program and dial 11 When dialing the CONNECTED LED on the front of the unit will flash green When connected the CONNECTED LED on the front of the unit will illuminate solid green 12 From the Home screen use the down W navigation button to select Cxns and view connection Status and press to view connection statistics for IP packets being sent over the connection To negotiate higher bit rates press then
51. STLs and audio distribution 48kbps 128kbps Opus Stereo Very high quality stereo remotes STLs and audio distribution 64kbps 256kbps Configuring an Algorithm in the Codec 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen 2 Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select Connect and press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 173 3 Select IP and press the button 4 Select your preferred IP Session mode and press the button 5 Use the down W navigation button to select Setup and press the P4 button 6 Navigate to Algorithm and press or 7 Navigate to Manual to configure all settings manually or Profile to choose a pre configured algorithm profile then press or How do I choose the right algorithm The algorithm you select will not only affect the quality of the broadcast but it will also contribute to the amount of latency or delay introduced For example if MP2 algorithms are used program delays will be much longer than when using Tieline Music or MusicPLUS algorithms This is due to the additional inherent encoding delays involved when using MP2 algorithms This can be a major consideration for live applications that integrate remotes into a broadcast The algorithm you choose to connect with will also depend upon e The codecs you are connecting to Tieline versus non Tieline e Whether you are creating multi unicast connections e Whether you are connecting using SIP
52. Stereo MP2 J Stereo or E apt X Mono or Stereo e Sample Rate 32kHz or 48kHz 1 Navigate to the B channel you want to dial over and press the Ent Dial button 2 Use the keypad to enter the number of the line you are dialing 3 Press the Ent Dial button again to make the outgoing call from the codec 4 lf dialing two B channels navigate to the second B channel and use the keypad to enter the number then press the Ent Dial button Note the codec screen will display IMUX UNLOCKED until you dial additional connections when bonding multiple channels Important Note When dialing a mono or stereo connection over two B channels audio is r gt not available until the second connection is successful Connecting to CDQ Prima ISDN Use the following information to connect a Tieline codec to a Musicam CDQ Prima codec Programming the CDQ Prima for a Mono Connection Select a mono profile in the Prima codec for the connection Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 205 1 Press the SDIAL button on the front panel of the codec 2 When ID NUM is displayed press 8 and then press Enter using the down arrow 3 MPEG2 64K QS will be displayed briefly followed by WORKING 4 OK will be displayed momentarily and then the LCD screen will return to the default screen and be programmed for e A Mono connection 64Kbps Bit Rate e 48K Sample Rate e MPEG Layer 2 algorithm
53. THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Open Source netperf License Copyright C 1993 Hewlett Packard Company ALL RIGHTS RESERVED THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE USE REPRODUCTION MODIFICATION OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION WILL NOT INFRINGE A THIRD PARTY S INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS HP DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION IS ERROR FREE HP DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE DOCUMENTATION HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY WILL NOT IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS RELATED TO ANY USE REPRODUCTION MODIFICATION OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION Open Source Info ZIP license Copyright c 1990 2001 Info ZIP All rights reserved For the purposes of this copyright and license Info ZIP is defined as the following set of individuals Mark Adler John Bush Karl Davis Harald Denker Jean Michel Dubois Jean loup Gailly Hunter Goatley Ian Gorman Chris Herborth Dirk Haase Greg Hartwig Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 230 Merlin
54. These secondary strikes are induced by lightning strikes and also produce dangerously high currents and energy levels You only need to be near an object struck by lightning to lead to personal injury or damage to equipment e g if you are located near a lighting tower at a sports facility water features and drains on golf courses you may be affected by these secondary strikes Damage to personnel and Tieline codecs may occur during thunderstorm even if the codec is turned off but remains connected to the phone or ISDN system LAN or the power ANY DAMAGE TO A TIELINE PRODUCT CAUSED BY LIGHTNING or an ELECTRICAL STORM WILL VOID THE WARRANTY Use of this product is subject to Tieline s SOFTWARE LICENSE and WARRANTY conditions which should be viewed at www tieline com support before using this product DIGITAL PHONE SYSTEM WARNING DO NOT CONNECT YOUR Tieline CODEC TO A DIGITAL PHONE SYSTEM PERMANENT DAMAGE MAY OCCUR If you are unfamiliar with any facility check that the line you are using is NOT a digital line If the Tieline codec becomes faulty due to the use of a digital phone system the WARRANTY WILL BE VOID WARNING HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT EARTH CONNECTION ESSENTIAL BEFORE CONNECTING SUPPLY lf the total leakage current exceeds 3 5 mA or if the leakage current of the connected loads is unknown connect the supplementary ground terminal to a reliable ground connection in your facility Supplementary ground connection A
55. U interface The situation is different in Europe the UK most of Asia Australia Africa and parts of the Middle East where the phone company is allowed to supply the NT 1 and the customer is given an S T interface The NT 1 is a relatively simple device that converts a 2 wire U interface into the 4 wire S T interface If you have an NT 1 device connected to the U interface line then you will require a Tieline Euro ISDN G5 module S T interface model TLISDNEUROGS If you don t have an NT 1 device installed then the Tieline US ISDN G5 module U interface model TLISDNUSGS will be required You can ring your telecommunications provider to ask if you re not sure Note In Japan use the Tieline Euro ISDN module Important Note Tieline S T Euro ISDN G5 modules do not have internal terminating resistors When you connect terminating equipment such as a Tieline codec to an NI 1 100 ohm termination resistors must be connected between pins 3 and 6 and between W Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 EES Merlin User Manual v 1 4 pins 4 and 5 at the last socket on the ISDN line Check your NT 1 device user manual as this may be supported Suppliers of electronic components sell suitable plugs with termination resistors when required Please note U interface ISDN terminations do not require terminating resistors How to Configure ISDN G5 Modules To configure the codec to dial using ISDN for the first time 1 Ensure that the correct country sett
56. and ensure it is Enabled r ia i m k 7 M je pije 5 n it ee m Pa mL SS 2 Configure the dBFS threshold and timeout duration in seconds within the Conditions pane and ensure the input check boxes are selected An alarm will be raised when these thresholds are breached zt 5 n o g G naiai ah o ee 3 Click Apply or OK to save settings Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 160 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Configuring Alarm Dissemination Severity Alerts Alerts for each alarm severity level are configured using the Alarm Dissemination tab 1 Click Alarm Dissemination 2 Click to highlight the Alarm Severity level you want to configure then select and configure the alerts as required 3 Click Apply or OK to save settings SNMP Trap Configuration Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a protocol used to manage devices on IP networks SNMP prowdes the ability to send traps notifications or alerts which are packets containing data relating to a system component These packets are generated by agents ona managed device and may be either statistic or status related Please see your system administrator if you require more information 1 Click to select the Send SNMP trap check box 2 Click edit to open the Enter the SNMP trap target dialog and enter the SNMP trap target then click OK Tieline Pty Ltd 2014
57. and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRA
58. and press the button Use the navigation button to navgate down to WebGUI and press the button Select Alt Port and press ox Use the KEYPAD to enter a new port number and press the button to save the new setting 6 Type the IP address of your codec into your browser with a full colon and then the new port number 0O A WwW N gt Important Note Any new port specified must be within the range 2000 to 65535 inclusive Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 19 2 Changing the Default Password The default password for the Toolbox web GUI is password Enter this to use the web GUI and Tieline highly recommends changing the default password as soon as possible to protect your codec from being tampered with during live broadcasts Authentication Required Tieline T4 Enter password to access Tieline on 172 165 113 235 Password eereess How can lsetthe password Caution Codecs connected to the internet can be accessed by anyone with knowledge of the codec s public IP address Setting a strong password protects your equipment from being tampered with and jeopardizing live broadcasts Creating a New Password The authentication login password can be changed at any time using the codec keypad and LCD screen Note that passwords are case sensitive 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Use the navigation button to select WebGUI and press the button 3 Select Password and press or 4 Use the KEYPAD to
59. are only copying programs onto codecs Backup Restore 6 Click Restore to copy the configuration file settings onto the codec confirmation of successful file restoration is provided be Po r r mii J Ee ee T a z prs 2 ai P r Teer i F Ten af hy i C n Qe Sea Trem F Sew ie 7 Reboot the codec to ensure the restored configuration will take effect in the codec 20 18 Lock or Unlock Programs It is possible to lock a loaded custom program in a codec to ensure the currently loaded program type e g mono cannot be unloaded by a codec dialing in with a different program type e g stereo For example if you require the codec at the studio to always connect in mono simply load and lock a mono program in the codec Generally programs will be up or down mixed by the answering codec to match the loaded program type In some situations incompatible program types will be rejected 1 Open the web GUI and click the Settings symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel 2 Click the Options button at the top of the Settings panel 3 Click the Lock Loaded User Program check box to lock or unlock a user program in the codec Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 ox 3 eesti yr Sen igui M o IM 154 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Network Audio SIP Firmware Licensing Reset 9002 TA TE z EET oe Sao
60. betw een announcers is required Highly compatible w ith other brands of audio codec Low quality and used generally for compatibility Highly compatible w ith other brands of audio codec Good voice quality audio for remotes and other voice quality applications Highly compatible w ith other brands of audio codec Very high quality audio for remotes STLs and audio distribution Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 175 and music e Moderate bit rates e High delay MPEG Layer 3 Upto 100ms 64kbps 8 5 15kHz 13 3kbps LC AAC Up to 64ms 64kbps 15kbps 15kHz Up to 128ms 48kbps 7 4kbps 15kHz Up to 128ms Minimum 15kHz Up to 20ms at 20kHz 48kHz Up to 15 30ms 20kHz AAC ELDv 2 Up to 35ms 20kHz aptX Enhanced 10Hz 2 5ms at 24kHz 48kHz Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 and music at low est bit rate better quality at higher bit rates e Moderate delay at moderate to high bit rates HE AAC v 1 and music at the low est bit rate better quality at higher bit rates e Low to Moderate bit rates e High delay HE AAC v 2 16kbps and music Mono e Low bit rates 24kbps e High delay stereo 7 4kbps 30kbps 15 30kbps Pending release AAC LD 48kbps minimum Very high quality voice and music e Very low delay at low to moderate bit rates AAC ELD 24 kbps minimum Very high quality voice and music e Very low delay at low
61. button 3 Navigate to the program you want to delete and press the button ae ee Studio 2 4 Navigate to Delete and press the button Program Studia 5 5 Confirm the deletion and press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 e 18 17 Selecting Algorithm Profiles A number of pre programmed mono and stereo dialing profiles are available for programming the codec quickly without individually selecting algorithms and bit rates etc These profiles have been programmed with the most popular settings that provide high quality connections using each available algorithm Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons to select Connect and press the button Select IP and press the button Select your preferred IP Session mode and press the button Use the down Ww navigation button to select Setup and press the button Select Algorithm and press the button Use the right gt navigation button to select Profile Choose the profile you want from the Favorite Mono or Stereo menus CON Oot WN Select Category m Stereo Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Codec Home Screen Elements p Favorite Displays a list of favorite profiles that have been selected manually within the codec by users 2 Mono Displays preprogrammed mono profiles within the codec 3 Stereo Displays preprogrammed stereo
62. compatible non G3 remote codecs corresponding contacts l e Inout 1 shorted Output 1 contacts on all connected codecs closed SoOQoO0o 0080 Pins Pin Function __ _ Ground Output 4 l M 3 Output 3 4 Output 2 5 Output 1 6 Ground 7 Input 3 8 Input 1 9 Output 4 10 Output 3 11 Output 2 12 Output 1 13 Ground 14 Input 4 15 Input 2 Female DB 15 Codec Connector YD Important Note For more information about how to program relay operations with a PC using the Toolbox web GUI please see Creating Rules Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 235 RS232 Pin outs and Data Connections P Dow ezaz pee ain OTe DB9 RS232 DCE GSYS74 EH No Connection No connection 2 TxData RX Data 3 RXData TX Data 4 No connection No connection 5 Signal Ground Signal Ground 6 No Connection No connection 7 cts RT 8 RTS CTS 9 No connection No connection 1 5 5 1 Ooo0go EEEE Oooo EEE 6 9 g 6 DB9 Male DB9 Female Connector Pins Connector Pins Important Notes e The codec cannot send RS232 data to or activate relays on Tieline G3 codecs e t is important that you enable serial port flow control within the codec Flow control regulates the flow of data through the serial port If disabled data will flow unregulated and some may be lost e Ensure you match the serial port baud rate to
63. display audio levels for inputs and outputs 2 Connections Provides a Summary of connection details and audio streams 3 Maximize Minimize Click to maximize a panel to view it in full screen mode or click to minimize back to the default panel size 4 Close button Click to close the Master panel Connect button Click Connect to connect all audio streams configured within the currently selected program in the Programs list this button also loads the program currently selected in the Programs list Load button Click to Load the codec with the program currently selected in the Programs list 7 Programs list E all configured programs which have been added into the codec Click to select a program before loading or connecting 8 Disconnect button Click to disconnect the currently selected audio stream or a specific connection Note this button becomes a Connect or Unload button when all audio streams are disconnected Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 at Programs Panel for Connection Configuration 1 Programs List Displays all programs in the codec 2 New Program button Click to add a new program 3 Program Name The name of the currently selected program in the panel 4 Edit Name Click to edit the name of the currently selected program 5 Audio Stream overview Click the blue arrows to expand audio stream and connection information click the Edit symbol to adjust prog
64. e Static versus DHCP assigned IP addresses e Network Address Translation NAT port forwarding and firewalls Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 22 3 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 197 Understanding IP Networks Types of IP Addresses Available Address is Allocated Public Static Public IP Internet Service ISP s allocate a static public IP address to Address Providers ISPs allow network devices to communicate with each other over the internet It works like a public telephone number and will allow your remote codec to call your studio codec over the Internet Dynamically Internet Service ISP s usually allocate dynamically Assigned Public Providers ISPs automatically assigned public IP IP Address addresses to allow network devices to communicate with each other over the Internet Not recommended for studio installations because each time you connect to your ISP the IP address can change Private Dynamically DHCP Server Router A DHCP server allocated IP address that is Assigned Private on your own private automatically assigned to a device on a IP Address LAN network LAN to allow it to communicate with other devices and the internet This address can change each time a device connects A network administrator allocated static address which is programmed into a device to allow it to connect to a LAN Often a security measure to only allow access to devices approved by
65. exit the menu 4 Use the down Ww navigation button to highlight Input Level and press the button 5 Navigate to the channels you want to adjust and press fox 6 Press the number on the keypad corresponding to the channel you want to toggle on or off E g press O on the numeric keypad to toggle channel 1 on and off 7 Use the left lt or right gt navigation buttons to select the appropriate gain setting then press the button to save the settings Inout Audio Level BEREERERRRRRREE Gang 1 2 Disabled ci Important Note SS e To adjust levels quickly press and press and release the right arrow button to open the Input Audio Level adjustment screen e 15 volt phantom power can only be supplied on the auxiliary input this is disabled by default Inout Audio Level ul 1 EEREEEEEREEEEE Gang 1 2 Disabled O Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 25 __ Input Audio Features _ Description _ Z Z Z Z Z 1 Channel On Symbol Symbol indicates a channel is turned on 2 Channel Off Symbol Symbol indicates a channel is turned off 3 Inout 1 Level Control Ch 1 level indication with percentage of gain indicated i e 66 4 Input 2 Level Control Ch 1 level indication with percentage of gain indicated i e 72 5 Ch1 2 Gang Indication Indicates whether ganging is enabled or disabled Auxiliary Input Adjustment The codec has 1 x 6 35mm 1 4 Mic Line level Jac
66. for conditions that warrant administrative attention SPID Service Profile ID for identifying devices over ISDN networks STL Studio to transmitter link for program audio feeds STS Studio to studio audio link TCP wooo UDP Unicast VLAN TCP protocol ensures reliable in order delivery of data packets between a sender and a receiver Time to Live is the setting used in muliticast servers to ensure data packets have a finite life and don t cause congestion over networks User Datagram Protocol the most commonly used protocol for sending internet audio and video streams UDP packets include information which allows them to travel independently of previous or future packets in a data stream Broadcasting of a single stream of data between two points Virtual Local Area Network partitioning of a single layer 2 network to create multiple distinct broadcast domains WAN Wide Area Network a computer network spanning regions and or countries to connect separate LANs Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 9 4 Getting to know Merlin The 1RU Merlin rack mount IP codec is designed for the latest digital IP broadcast networks and delivers high quality bidirectional stereo and full duplex communications for remote broadcast connections Connect to IP codecs or smartphones using Report IT as well as ISDN and POTS codecs wa optional plug in transport modules Merlin has multiple levels of power a
67. in the US 10 Navigate up to Apply Settings and press the button Dialing from the Tieline Codec Program Dialing 1 If you have saved the ISDN program as previously instructed press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt Programs 2 Select the saved program you want to load and press the button Select Load and press the button to load the program 4 Press the CONNECT button to dial the ISDN program connections ee Ad Hoc Dialing 1 If you haven t save the program but have entered the dialing numbers and other settings press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN gt Connect 2 Press the button to dial using the settings previously entered Important Note If you select different algorithm settings on each codec and dial from the Tieline codec the connection will be unsuccessful and the CONNECTED LED on the front panel of the Tieline codec will continuously flash Adjust the algorithm settings and attempt to reconnect Dialing from the Mayah Sporty Important Note Configure ISDN Answer Config settings in the Tieline codec before attempting to dial from the Equinox to the Tieline codec Select the following settings in the Tieline codec in one of the Configs see ISDN Answering Configuration for more detail e May bond e Sessionless e Algorithm G 722 MP2 Mono MP2 Stereo MP2 J Stereo or E apt X Mono or Stereo e Sample Rate 32kHz or 48k
68. in the confirmation dialog to disconnect all audio stream connections nN Are you sure you want to disconnect the connection Dial Cxn 1 20 15 View Edit Delete Programs D Important Notes You cannot edit or delete a program when it is currently loaded in the codec ensure you have unloaded a program prior to editing the current configuration To view configuration settings for an existing program or edit settings 1 Open the web GUI and click the Programs symbol at the top of the screen to display the Programs panel 2 Click to select a program in the left hand pane 3 Click the blue arrow to expand audio stream information and click the Edit symbol to adjust program settings 4 The program wizard will open at the relevant point to facilitate editing of connection parameters Click Save Program to store settings Deleting Programs There are two ways to delete a program 1 Ensure the program you want to delete is not currently loaded in the codec 2 Click to select a program listed on the left hand side of the Programs panel and then right click to display menu options Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 150 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 3 Select and click Delete Program 4 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog 5 Alternatively click Delete Program next to the program name in the top right corner of the Programs panel 20 16 Reset Factory Default Settings There are several
69. match the rate of the external device you are connecting to Ideally the settings on both codecs should match or you could have data overflow issues e Only the dialing codec needs to be programmed to send RS232 data Session data sent from the dialing codec will program all other compatible codecs non G3 when you connect o gt Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 23 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 index 2 2 x Stereo Peer to Peer program about 49 A AAC 171 AES EBU audio levels 28 input and output 28 input audio settings 28 output sample rate 105 sample rate 28 sample rate conversion 28 web GUI configuration 28 AES3 audio levels 28 input and output 28 input audio settings 28 output sample rate 105 sample rate 28 sample rate conversion 28 web GUI configuration 28 AES3 in out 11 Alarms acknowledging 161 AES input 157 AES reference signal 157 alerts 157 configuration 157 deactivating 161 enabling 157 fan failure 157 history 161 indications 161 input silence 157 lost connection 157 managing 161 PSU failure 157 purge history 161 severity levels 157 silence detection parameters 157 SNMP trap configuration 157 temperature 157 types of alarms 15 7 Algorithm favorites 69 profiles 69 Algorithms configuration 1 71 types 1 71 Answer routes 216 Applications 9 apt X Enhanced audio coding 171 Audio levels adjustment 22 ganging inputs 22 IGC 22 IGC Auto Level 22 intelligent gain c
70. of Dial and Answer Routes is not recommended over IP See Configuring ISDN Answering or Configuring POTS Answerin for more information Use the default settings for IP connections Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 129 2 This audio stream connection in the wizard will allow the codec to dial Enter the connection name in the text box then click Next 3 Follow the instructions on the right hand side of the panel to configure the transport settings for the connection then click Next Important Note Bidirectional auxiliary IP data is available on one audio stream When auxiliary data is enabled on one stream the option is greyed out for the other audio stream in the program wizard See RS232 Data Configuration for detailed information on RS232 data and see Enabling Relays and RS232 Data for more information on relay operations 4 Configure destination codec dialing and encoding settings For IP connections configure the IP address ports and then specify which streaming interface is used to dial this connection e g Primary port ETH1 or Secondary port ETH2 Note By default Any will select ETH1 if it is available and ETH2 if it is unavailable Click Save Program to save the program with the default algorithm jitter and FEC settings which are physically entered in the codec Alternatively click Next to specify individual algorithm jitter buffer and FEC settings and configure a backup
71. power supply connections GPIO Dual RJ 45 LAN Control Port ports for Ethernet BNC Word 4 inputs and 10 100 1000 Clock Sync 4 opto isolated network Connector relay outs connections Balanced XLR Line input 2 XLR Analog and AES3 Inputs XLR IN1 AES3 and IN 2 are balanced line inputs Input 1 can also be used as an AES3 AES EBU digital input This input accepts both mono and stereo digital AES3 signals XLR Analog and AES3 Outputs XLR OUT 1 and 2 are balanced analog audio line outputs AES3 OUT is an AES EBU digital audio output Both the analog and digital outputs can be used simultaneously and the AES3 output can send both mono and stereo signals via the single XLR output Dual Gigabit Ethernet Ports The codec features two Gigabit 10 100 1000 RJ 45 Ethernet ports for IP connections By default the codec assumes ETH1 is the primary LAN connection and ETH2 is the backup LAN connection when in use If you are only using one Ethernet port always use ETH1 Aux Mic Line Input AUX IN 6 35mm 1 4 balanced auxiliary mic or line input Headphone Out Aux Line Out HP AUX OUT 6 35mm 1 4 software configurable stereo headphone output or balanced auxiliary line output The front panel HEADPHONE output and rear panel HP AUX OUT share the same hardware output This means both are switched and configured together l e both outputs are either a stereo headphone output default setting or a balanced mono auxiliary o
72. press K 44 to use the numeric KEYPAD to name the program Then press C4 to save the program 13 Press the CONNECT button to make a connection The Wait Connecting screen appears during the connection process Connecting to 324957852 Note To load a saved program and dial press the HOME button navigate to Programs select the program you want to dial and press the CONNECT button to load the program and dial 15 To negotiate higher bit rates press then 3 on the numeric KEYPAD for lower bit rates press then 9 J Important Note To load a saved program and dial press the HOME button navigate to Programs select the program you want to dial and press the CONNECT button to load the program and dial See Monitoring POTS Connections for more details on monitoring the different POTS connection states 18 6 Monitoring POTS Connections Monitoring POTS Calls when Dialing and Connecting 1 When dialing and connecting e The CONNECTED LED on the front of the unit will flash green e The Cxns section on the Home screen displays Pending while the call is connecting prior to streaming audio data Home Direct 924987521 CHns 0 POTS Pending Cxns Displays Pending e Connecting is displayed in the Modules menu via Settings gt Modules tdodule Setinas hodule 1 ISDN U hodule 2 POTS Connecting Modules Displays Connecting 2 While connecting you can also monitor dial tones and modem handshaking etc wa the lef
73. profiles within the codec Adding a Profile into the Favorite Menu O ON Ona fwWwWN gt Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons to select Connect and press the button Select IP and press the button Select your preferred IP Session mode and press the button Use the down W navigation button to select Setup and press the button Press the button to select Algorithm Use the right gt navigation button to select Profile Select the profile you want from the Mono or Stereo menus Press the hatch pound button to add the profile into the Favorite menu Profiles that have been added into the Favorite menu are identified by the hatch pound symbol next to their name after they have been selected Select Profile 4 favontel AAC St43kH2 128kb 4A4C ST43KH2 256kb 440 HE St 32kH2 24kb Deleting a Profile from the Favorite Menu O ON Oo f wWN Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons to select Connect and press the button Select IP and press the button Select your preferred IP Session mode and press the button Use the down W navigation button to select Setup and press the button Press the button to select Algorithm Use the right gt navigation button to select Profile Select the profile you want to delete from the Favorite menus Press the hatch pound button to delete the selected profi
74. releases including but not limited to labeling of the altered versions with the names Info ZIP or any variation thereof including but not limited to different capitalizations Pocket UnZip WiZ or MacZip without the explicit permission of Info ZIP Such altered versions are further prohibited from is representative use of the Zip Bugs or Info ZIP e mail addresses or of the Info ZIP URL s 4 Info ZIP retains the right to use the names Info ZIP Zip UnZip Wiz Pocket UnZip Pocket Zip and MacZip for its own source and binary releases Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 231 22 13 Trademarks and Credit Notices 1 Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries 2 Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries 3 Firefox is a registered trademark of Mozilla Corporation in the United States and or other countries Solaris is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and or other countries Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U S and other countries Java is a trade mark Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and or other countries Comrex Vector Matrix and BlueBox are registered trademarks of Comrex Corporation in the United States and or other countries APT is a register
75. required Important Note Select Other in the Encoding drop down menu when connecting to Comrex Vector Matrix and BlueBox codecs On the Comrex codec select its Music algorithm Please note that 9 6kbps connections are not supported by the Comrex codecs Dial and Answer Route Settings in Programs Dial Route and Answer Route tags allow you to associate a POTS Config with a particular incoming audio stream from either Tieline or non Tieline codecs In principle this operates similarly to how audio ports are used to route multiple audio streams over IP Selecting different IP audio port numbers allows users to define which incoming IP audio stream is routed to a specific answering audio stream configuration on the codec This ensures inbound calls from multiple codecs can be consistently routed to the same answering audio streams and therefore the same inputs and outputs This is not necessary in simple point to point POTS audio stream configurations however it is very useful in multiple audio stream codecs which support POTS connections When dialing Tieline to Tieline over POTS using the Merlin or Genie family of codecs you can configure a Dial Route in the dialing codec s program and a corresponding Answer Route in the answering codec s program This will ensure a particular audio stream is routed between two codecs consistently Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 104 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 2 x Mono Peer to Peer POTS Audio
76. select the gang function and press the button to toggle ganging on off e Use the up and down Ww navigation buttons to select a single channel or ganged channels Note A channel is highlighted when selected e Use the left and right gt navigation buttons to adjust the input levels up or down 2 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen select Connect gt POTS and press the button Connect DO e e gt ISOH POTS 4 3 Use the RETURN button to delete any numbers if already entered then use the numeric KEYPAD to enter the number you want to dial Note When Module Ready is displayed throughout POTS menus it means the POTS module has initialized and is ready to accept or make a call Connect POTS Module2 Ready 92495752 4 Navigate to Setup and press the button Connect POTS i hodulez Read 5 Select Via to nominate the module used when dialing a connection or select Any to use any available module in the codec then press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 so POTS Connect Setup i Module2 Ready Wia todule Node POTS Codec Algorithm hdusic Mono 6 Navigate to the connection Mode and press the button to toggle between selecting either POTS Codec or Analog Phone Note Redundant settings in the menu will disappear If you select Analog Phone POTS Connect Setup i Module Ready Wia hode POTS Codec Algorithm Music hono 7 Sel
77. to configure a POTS module in module slot 1 or navigate to Config 2 and press to configure a POTS module in module slot 2 Pots Answer Contias Contig 1 Module1 Music Mono Tieline Codecs Cong 2 hodule2 husit Mone Tieline Codecs Reset Pots Answer Configs 4 Select Info to view current settings or Edit to adjust Config settings then press the button POTS Answer Conta 1 5 Select Disable when connecting to Tieline codecs using session data or select Enable if Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 45 connecting to non Tieline codecs only then press the button ISOM Answer Confia 1 Sessionless Only ci Important Note Select Disable if the codec is expected to receive POTS calls from Tieline codecs or both Tieline and non Tieline codecs i e you are not sure which type of codec may call In this mode once the codec answers a call it expects to receive Tieline session data from the caller and configure its own algorithm settings according to that If it fails to receive Tieline session data within 5 seconds e g a Comrex POTS codec is calling it will use the settings in the ISDN Answering Config instead Enable Sessionless Only when answering POTS calls from non Tieline codecs only When Sessionless is configured the codec will not wait for the session data This reduces the time taken to answer an inbound sessionless call 6 Select Other when connecting to Comrex Vector Matrix
78. to enable serial port flow control as it regulates the flow of data through the serial port If disabled data will flow unregulated and some may be lost e Ensure you configure the serial port baud rate to match the setting of the external device to which you are connecting Ideally the settings on both codecs should match or you could have data overflow issues Only the dialing codec needs to be configured to send RS232 data Session data sent from the dialing codec will configure all other compatible codecs non G3 when you connect 20 24 Creating Rules The Rules panel in the Toolbox web GUI is used to program events for specific codec actions Typically these rules are based on a change in the state of a GPIO control port or the codec being connected or disconnected Rules can only be created with the web GUI while the codec is disconnected A Important Note Data transmission is disabled by default Data must be enabled in the Connection menu to enable contact closure operation and RS232 data Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select Connect and press the button Select IP and press the button Select your preferred IP Mode and press the button Use the down Ww navigation button to select Setup and press the button Navigate to Data and press to toggle between Enabled and Disabled O O A WwW YP For more information please see Enabling Relays
79. to select the check box for Create a Backup Connection Adjust the parameters and click Next 1 Deselect Create a Backup Connection to disable Backup 2 Enter the Lost Data Threshold percentage 3 Enter the Lost Data Time Frame in milliseconds 500 30000 4 Enter the Keep Alive Time in seconds 3 30 before fail over 5 Select if the connection should support Automatic Resume 6 Enter the Automatic Resume Stable Time in seconds 15 60 7 Enter the number of Maximum Connection Retries 1 10 8 Enter the Automatic Resume Time Frame for retries in minutes 10 60 Da erence al Cancel Note The explanations wthin the followng table can be used to assist wth backup connection configuration The percentage of lost data measured during a given time frame The time frame against which lost data is measured The keep connection alive time before failing over to a backup connection Tieline RIP pings every second to confirm connectivity Select the check box to configure fail back to a higher priority connection The amount of time a primary connection must remain Stable before attempting to fail back from the backup connection The maximum number of fail back retries a codec can try before ending fail back attempts 7 Time Frame The time frame used to measure the number of fail back retries attempted 2 Enter a name for the backup connection and click Next Tieline Pty Ltd 2014
80. within the selected Input Silence duration The alarm is then deactivated Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 166 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 automatically and the codec will reconnect Rule 4 Synchronise Local Control Port Input Status with a Remote Relay Output Use this rule allow a local codec s control port input to change the state of a remote relay output 1 Click the fourth rule in the Rules panel 2 Click the drop down arrow to select the local control port input used to control a remote relay output Create rule Cancel 3 Check the Rule summary and click Create Rule to save the settings Rule 5 Toggle a Relay Output with each Change in Connection Status This rule is used to toggle a codec s control port relay output each time a program connects and disconnects 1 Click the fifth rule in the Rules panel 2 Click the drop down Relay arrow and select the relay output you want to toggle 3 Click the drop down Program arrow to select a specific program which will affect the relay toggle function or use the default setting whereby any program will toggle the relay output ee a Create rule Cancel 4 Check the Rule summary and click Create Rule to save the settings Deleting Rules 1 Click the Rules ued symbol at the top of the web GUI screen to open the Rules panel 2 Click the Delete button next to the rule you want to delete 3 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin
81. you select e Local and Remote FEC settings if required Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 136 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ispn For ISDN settings are determined by ISDN module answering settings For more details see Configuring ISDN Answering For POTS settings are determined by POTS module answering settings For more details see Configuring POTS Answering 6 After configuring all settings there are 2 options i If you want to create another answering connection select the check box for Create another answering connection and continue through the wizard li Click Next Stream to configure the IFB audio stream 7 Enter the IFB Audio Stream name and select Answer only then click Next Program Summary Stereo Audio S IFB 9 Configure the transport settings For IP click the drop down Session Protocol menu and select Tieline Codecs and ensure the Any check box is not selected then click Next Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 137 T Important Note When Tieline Codecs is the Session Protocol selected amp using Tieline session data the Return Audio Port is automatically configured as UDP audio port 9010 by default for the second audio stream Click to configure e Auto Jitter Adapt and the preferred auto jitter setting using the drop down arrow for Buffer Priority or e Fixed Buffer Level and enter the Jitter Depth which must be between 12ms and 5000
82. your codec is connected over the internet via a public static IP address it is possible to connect and configure it from any PC which is also connected to the internet IP Configuration To configure codec IP settings see Configuring IP Settings LAN Troubleshooting PC LAN Settings Check the LAN settings on your PC if it is connected to a LAN and is having trouble opening the Toolbox web GUI in a web browser Open Internet Explorer Click Tools gt Internet Options gt Connections Click the LAN settings button If the PC is using a proxy server over the LAN you may need to select the Bypass proxy server for local addresses option box 5 If you still can t connect click the Advanced button in the LAN Settings dialog and ask your IT administrator to assist you with entering the IP address of the codec into the Exceptions pane of the Proxy Settings dialog RON Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Port Selection By default port 80 is used by your PC to communicate with the codec and launch the web GuUI If port 80 cannot be used across your network for some reason type the IP address of your codec into your browser with a full colon and the port number 8080 E g 192 168 0 176 8080 It is also possible to specify a different port for connecting the Toolbox web GUI to your codec Press the HOME button on the codec to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons to select Settings
83. 014 204 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 22 1 2 normally required in the US 10 Navigate up to Apply Settings and press the button Dialing from the Tieline Codec Program Dialing 1 If you have saved the ISDN program as previously instructed press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt Programs 2 Select the saved program you want to load and press the button Select Load and press the button to load the program 4 Press the CONNECT button to dial the ISDN program connections 1 Ad Hoc Dialing 1 If you haven t save the program but have entered the dialing numbers and other settings press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN gt Connect 2 Press the button to dial using the settings previously entered ci Important Note If you select different algorithm settings on each codec and dial from the _ Tieline codec the connection will be unsuccessful and the CONNECTED LED on the front panel of the Tieline codec will continuously flash Adjust the algorithm settings and attempt to reconnect Dialing from the WorldCast Equinox Important Note Configure ISDN Answer Config settings in the codec before attempting N to dial from the Equinox to the Tieline codec Select the following settings in the Tieline codec in one of the Configs see ISDN Answering Configuration for more detail e May bond e Sessionless e Algorithm G 722 MP2 Mono MP2
84. 1 Enter the number to dial using the numeric keypad Press the Enter button bottom arrow and the screen will briefly display Working then Connect and then the green Framed light should illuminate on the front panel I RON Making a Stereo Call from the CDQ Prima Codec Press the Dial button on the front panel of the codec Use the Enter button and select Both Enter the first number to dial using the numeric keypad Press the Enter button bottom arrow and the screen will briefly display Dialling line 1 and then Connect 5 Enter the second number to dial using the numeric keypad and press the Enter button bottom arrow 6 The screen will briefly display Dialling line 2 then Connect and then the green Framed light should illuminate on the front panel RON ci Important Note When connecting in stereo the Prima expects both B channel dials to occur within 5 seconds This can be performed by the Tieline codec It has also been noted that the CDQ Prima codec will not connect if no audio is present when dialing It may connect Prima gt Tieline but not Tieline gt Prima If audio is present the codec should connect and stay connected even if audio is removed subsequently The J Stereo light on the Prima may also flash when in this mode Ideally have audio connected when dialing and the codec will frame immediately after the first dial and then dial the second B c
85. 11 e SmartStream PLUS redundant streaming for high reliability over IP networks without Quality of Service IPv4 amp IPv6 compatible and ready Supports ISDN and POTS connections via optional interface modules Asymmetric algorithmic encode decode SNMP and integrated alarm management G5 Toolbox GUI enables remote codec control over WANs Compatible with Tieline Codec Management System Low latency in band RS 232 auxiliary data channel Programmable software rules engine via a GUI for Control Port functions Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 to Merlin User Manual v 1 4 e Streamlined codec wizards and GUI for configuration and control e Support for multiple languages English Spanish Portuguese French and Chinese e Connect to all Tieline IP codecs and Report IT iOS Android suite of Apps Supported in later releases Separate product Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 11 5 Rear Panel Connections Balanced XLR Balanced XLR Stereo AES3 RS 232 DB9 Slots for future Line input 1 or AES3 Channel 1 and 2 AES EBU for serial hardware module AES EBU digital Output via XLR device control upgrades stereo input Stereo Outputs Supplementary Ground Terminal KJ r cae a Ei s d AE our Balanced 6 35 mm 1 4 Aux mic line in top Configurable Stereo HP Out or Balanced Aux Line Out bottom Dual redundant IEC 100 240 Volt AC
86. 2 1 Configuring ISDN Modules ISDN settings in the Module menu determine how each codec module operates at a particular site You can copy similar programs between codecs installed at different locations and also configure site specific settings for how each ISDN module should connect ISDN module settings may need to be adjusted depending on your country and network requirements 1 Open the web GUI and click the Settings symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel 2 Click the Modules button at the top of the Settings panel 3 Select Module 1 or Module 2 4 Click the drop down arrow for Accept and select your preference of whether to allow or deny circuit switched voice or data calls according to your preferences The default setting allows both Voice amp Data D Important Note G 711 is the algorithm used when Voice Only is selected 5 Click the drop down arrow for Network and select the Network Type corresponding to the region in which you are using the codec see ISDN Module Configuration for more details 6 Click the drop down arrow for Line Type and select your preferred option Ask your Telco whether your ISDN line is Point to Point or Point to Multipoint By default select Point to Multipoint unless your switch type is an AT amp T 5ESS custom point to point 7 If you are in the US enter DN and SPID numbers as required or in other regions enter DN or MSN numbers as required 8 Click the Save Se
87. 232 and Control Port Wiring information Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select Connect and press the button Select IP and press the button Select Tieline or Sessionless and press the button Select Peer to Peer and press the button Use the down W navigation button to select Setup and press the button Navigate to Data and press to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Note default setting is Disabled N OO FP W DP gt Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 185 21 7 D Important Note Data transmission is disabled by default Configuring Control Port Contact Closure Operation The Rules panel in the web GUI can be used to configure switch inputs and relay outputs See the section titled Creating Rules for more information Configuring RS232 Data Once Data is enabled the codec can be connected to external devices and transport RS232 compatible data via the serial port on the rear panel of the codec 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Navigate to System and press or 3 Select RS232 Cfg and press CJ 4 Use the navigation buttons to select the correct baud rate 5 Select Enable for flow control and press to save all settings ci Important Notes e When connecting to G3 codecs over IP ISDN or POTS only in band data is available via the Music and MusicPLUS algorithms See RS232 Data Configuration for more details
88. 4 Click the Link symbol to temporarily disable the ganging function and fine tune channel audio levels Click the Link symbol again to resume ganging j E T k Channel 1 4 1 Setting Analog Audio Levels Audio levels on the Input panel should be set to ensure audio peaks average at the first yellow indications on the PPM meters which represents 4dBu These levels should also be checked against the Input PPM Meters on the Master panel Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 107 Other Input Controls Adjust the IGC Intelligent Gain Control input settings to Auto Fixed or Off as required ca Important Note When the auxiliary input AUX IN is On the default mixer configuration WY sends audio to all inputs If you are not using the auxiliary input ensure it is Off to avoid additional noise in program audio Locking Input Settings 1 Click the Lock 4 symbol to lock all Input panel settings 2 When locked the Input panel is greyed out and the lock symbol appears in the bottom left corner Note this lock function does not affect the codec front panel controls AES3 Output Sample Rate Configuration The AES3 output sample rate can be configured using the Toolbox web GUI 1 Open_the web GUI and click the Settings bod symbol at the top of the screen to open the Settings panel 2 Click the Audio tab and use the drop down menu to select your preferred AES Output Clock setting then click Save Settings
89. AD at any time to hangup all connections 2 Use the right gt navigation button to select Yes and press the DISCONNECT c button or the button to confirm the disconnection Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 64 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 18 13 Disconnect a Single Audio Stream not available for multi unicast connections 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen 2 Use the navigation buttons to select Cxns and press the button 3 Use the up and down Ww navigation buttons to select the connection you want to disconnect Connections 2035 36 205 165 Music Mona 205 56 205 188 husit Mono 3 Press the red DISCONNECT button on the numeric KEYPAD 4 Use the right gt navigation button to select Yes and press the DISCONNECT button or the button to confirm the disconnection Dialing SIP Peer to Peer Important Note When connecting to a Tieline G3 codec using SIP you need to manually select the G3 audio reference level To do this select SETTINGS gt Audio gt Ref Level gt Tieline G3 In addition select the following on the G3 codec prior to dialing e Select either a mono or stereo profile e Select Menu gt Configuration gt IP 1 Setup gt Session Type gt SIP e Select Menu gt Configuration gt IP1 Setup gt Algorithm gt G711 G722 or MP2 e For more information on dialing multiple peer to peer SIP connections see Multiple Peer to Peer SIP Programs Dialing Peer to
90. ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Open Source MIT style Licenses e glibc DNS resolver taken from BIND 4 9 5 o Portions Copyright C 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation e ncurses o Copyright c 1998 2010 2011 Free Software Foundation Inc o install sh 1994 X Consortium e OpenSSH o Portions of code under MIT style license to the copyright holders Free Software Foundation Inc Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions
91. Buffer Level and enter the Jitter Depth which must be between 12ms and 5000 ms depending on the algorithm you select Fi Click Save Program to save all settings or click Next to configure Auto Reconnect If you click Save Program select the check box if you want to connect the program immediately then click Finish Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 146 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 P paa Bo n __ 9 The newly created program will be displayed in the Programs panel and in the Master panel Dial the program by loading and connecting using the Master panel or dial_the program manually using the codec front panel 20 12 Multiple Peer to Peer SIP Programs The codec is also capable of creating multiple SIP Peer to Peer connections Configure a new program and configure each SIP audio stream as you would for a single SIP Peer to Peer program The SIP UDP audio ports are automatically allocated by the Toolbox web GUI when you create SIP programs incorporating multiple audio streams The first stream uses UDP audio port 5004 and then each subsequent stream created will in the following order use UDP audio ports 5006 5008 5010 5012 and 5014 These audio ports need to be open in your firewall at each end of the connection to allow the successful transfer of audio packets Answering Multiple SIP Calls To answer multiple SIP calls you need to create and lock_a suitable SIP answering program in the codec or it will be unloaded by the fi
92. CT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Original SSLeay License This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tyjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 29 If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms
93. Caution Don t forget to navigate up to Apply Settings and press the button to apply all module settings before leaving this menu 13 2 POTS Answering Configuration Connection setting preferences are normally exchanged via session data sent between two Tieline codecs when a connection is established If you answer a call from a non Tieline codec you will need to create an answering Config to determine the settings used when connecting and designate which module will answer the call if more than one POTS module is installed Important Notes e POTS Answer Config settings are applied to POTS Codec connections and not Analog Phone connections e When receiving a call from a Tieline codec sending session data i e not a Sessionless connection the algorithm setting from the dialing codec overrides the setting in the POTS Answer Config menu e The default POTS Answer Configs accept a call from an incoming Tieline codec with session data enabled They will also answer a call from a Comrex POTS codec by using the Other algorithm e For more information about POTS answering parameters including route configuration please see the web GUI section of this manual titled Configuring POTS Answering 1 Press the the SETTINGS button then navigate to Answering and press the button 2 Navigate to POTS Answer Configs and press the button Answering ISON Answer Contigs POTS Answer Configs 3 Navigate to Config 1 and press
94. Click the drop down arrows to select the control port input for connecting and the alternative one for disconnecting 3 Click the drop down Program arrow to select an individual program which will be connected and disconnected by the change in the control port input states Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 165 Create rule Cancel a 4 Check the Rule summary and click Create Rule to save the settings Rule 3 Disconnect on Input Silence and Reconnect on Input Audio Detected Use this rule to configure the codec to disconnect when input silence is detected and reconnect when input audio is subsequently restored For this rule to be activated an Input Silence alarm must be enabled This rule is activated according to the silence threshold Conditions configured in the Alarms panel for an Input Silence alarm To enable the rule 1 Click the third rule in the Rules panel 2 Click Create Rule Create rule Cancel Important Note When you use this rule we recommend you don t configure Enable Output File Playback on silence detection because the rule will terminate file playback Reconnecting After Input Silence The codec must detect input audio dBFS levels higher than the threshold settings in the Input Silence alarm to reconnect When audio above the nominated dBFS levels is detected the codec monitors input audio to ensure it doesn t drop below the recovery threshold setting more than 5 times
95. ES3 input sources to 96KHz sampling unless your audio source uses a 44 1kHz sample rate Output Sample Rate Converter The sample rate of the AES3 output is currently configured using the clock source setting via the SETTINGS button and then Audio gt Input Type gt AES3 Out This configures the sample rate frequency of all AES3 output signals and there are three possible settings AES Out Clock Source Locked to 4 E553 Input Heordcloack Sync in Locked to AES3 Input lf this setting is used the codec will use the sync information received by the AES3 XLR input this is the same as the AES Rx Clock setting in Tieline G3 codecs to set the sample rate within the codec This codec input also carries AES3 audio data Wordclock Sync In This setting configures the codec for a word clock source wa the SYNC INPUT on the codec rear panel this is the same as the External Word Clock setting in Tieline G3 codecs Often this will be a studio reference signal D A R S or Digital Audio Reference Signal In television broadcasting facilities the audio reference signal should be locked to the video reference if there Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 29 is one available The sample rate being received is recognized by the codec and automatically adjusted within it Sample rates from 32 kHz to 96 kHz are accepted including the most popular rates of 32 KHz 44 1 kHz and 48 kHz Fixed Sample Clock Select from a range of
96. Hz G 1 Press F4 ESC to return to the home screen 2 Press F2 Codec then F1 Connect then F3 Direct 3 Use the navigation buttons to select dial and press the OK button to dial all B channels Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 z0 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 22 7 4 Connecting to Telos Zephyr Xstream ISDN Configuring the Xstream to Make an ISDN Call 1 2 ee W VS Plug your ISDN line into the back of the codec and press the Codec button below the LCD screen on the Xstream Transmit should be highlighted and this lets you select your transmit algorithm of choice If it is not selected use the arrow buttons on the right hand side of the LCD screen to navigate to this menu item and press the SEL button to the right of the LCD screen to select the menu Use the arrow buttons to navigate to G 1 22 L2 J Stereo for an MPEG Layer 2 stereo connection or L2 Mono 64 or L2 Mono 128 for a mono connection depending on whether you have one or two B channels available Press the SEL button to store your setting and use the arrow down button to navigate to Receive Press the SEL button and select the same algorithm that you selected for Transmit previously and then press the SEL button to store your setting Important Note It you don t select the same algorithm for Transmit and Receive algorithms then it can take a long time to connect as the algorithms are scanned by
97. IP connection for the first time using the codec KEYPAD The temporary program will appear in the recent calls list if you want to redial the program Program List SIP 1 It is also possible to configure SIP programs using the Toolbox web GUI See the section titled Configuring SIP Programs for more information 18 15 Creating a Multicast Client Program Two different types of multicast programs need to be created when multicasting e A multicast server program is used by the broadcasting codec to send multicast IP packets to multicast routers on a network e A multicast client program is used by codecs to receive multicast IP audio packets Important Notes e You cannot edit a program when it is currently loaded in the codec e Ensure all connection related settings like the port algorithm bit rate etc match Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 e Merlin User Manual v 1 4 on both multicast server and client programs or they will not be able to join multicast streaming sessions The default UDP audio port is 9000 for a multicast client program configured via the codec front panel You can lock_a loaded custom program in a codec to ensure the currently loaded program cannot be unloaded by a codec dialing in with a different program type Always dial the multicast server codec connection first before connecting multicast client codecs Multicast client codecs will display return link quality LQ only The Return readin
98. IPv4 addressing details and configuration 19 Save Settings button Saves all configuration settings Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Help Panel O 0 x Dina E i _ Resources Event Log Download Event tog Support Logs 2 9 2 T eion R N About Details of the Toolbox web GUI and codec firmware versions as well as the codec serial number Resources Links to open the user manual in a new browser or view support information Support Logs En to download diagnostic information that can be sent to Tieline support 4 Event Logs Event Logs Logs Click to download user viewable event logs 5 Maximize Minimize Click to maximize a panel to view it in full screen mode or click to minimize back to the default panel size 6l Close button Click to close the Help panel Language Selection The Toolbox web GUI offers language support for several languages 1 Click on the language drop down menu arrow in the top right hand corner of the web GUI page 2 Select your language of choice English hed Portuguese French 3 Click to refresh your web browser and display the new lanquaae selected Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 20 1 Configuring IP Settings Click the Settings symbol to open the Settings panel and click the Network button to view Ethernet and VLAN interface settings in the web GuUI
99. Manual v 1 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 Connections Ww 2xMono Peer to Peer Ww Audio Stream 1 A cxn1 203 36 205 163 Audio Stream 2 203 36 205 188 Programs 2xMonoPeerto Peer A Stereo 2 x Mono p2p STLs Connect 2 Click Connect to load the program and connect all audio streams Disconnect All Audio Stream Connections 1 Click to select the program in the Connections pane e g 2 x Mono Peer to Peer in the following example Connections ProgramiC Address Status fe DxMono Peerto Peer Saat Audio Stream 1 cxn1 203 36 205 163 Connected LQ Snd 89 Rtn 99 TxMusic Mono Rx Music Mono Audio Stream 2 cxn1 203 36 205 188 Connected LQ Snd 89 Rtn 99 Tx Music Mono Rx Music Mono Programs 12 x Mono Peer to Peer 2 x Stereo 2 x Mono p2p STLs Disconnect b 2 Click the Disconnect button 3 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog to disconnect all audio stream connections i H b Are you sure you want to disconnect the program 2 x Mono Peer to Peer Disconnect a Single Audio Stream Connection 1 Click to select the audio stream connection you want to disconnect Connections _s i203 36 205 163 CC Audio Stream 2 cxn1 203 36 205 188 Connected LQ Snd75 Rtn 79 Tx Music Mono Rx Music Mono Programs 12 x Mono Peer to Peer 2 x Stereo 2 x Mono p2p STLs Disconnect h Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 149 2 Click the Disconnect button 3 Click Yes
100. Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Panel 0000 0 8 CU COO Oh OC OOO oe 3 Or Ss OO oC Feature 1 Network tab tab Click to edit or view codec network configuration settings 3 opine Options tab Click to configure RS232 and QoS data settings Session Port settings and SNMP 3 Audio tab Click to configure the AES Output Clock sample rate 4 SIP tab Click to edit or view SIP configuration settings 5 Modules tab Click to edit hardware module configuration 6 ISDN Answer tab Click to configure ISDN Answering settings 7 POTS Answer tab Click to configure POTS Answering settings 8 Firmware tab Click to view software versions and perform an upgrade 9 Licensing tab Click to select a license file and install it into the codec Reset Restore tab Click to reset codec default settings and perform backup restore of codec programs and settings 11 DNS Pane Activate to specify DNS addresses and domains to search 12 Maximize Minimize Click to maximize a panel to view it in full screen mode or click to minimize back to the default panel size 13 Close button Click to close the panel 14 Network Interface Select a network interface for configuration options 15 Network Interface Control and streaming configuration options for each network Identifier interface e g Ethernet Port 1 or 2 16 IPv6 details IPv6 addressing details and configuration 17 MAC Address Device MAC address 18 IPv4 details
101. Merlin User Manual v 1 4 115 3 Click Next to continue through the wizard and configure the backup connection in a similar manner to how you configured the primary connection Configuring Merlin to Answer Connections The codec is capable of being configured to accept calls via different transports e g IP and ISDN or to accept calls using different audio ports If you are configuring the codec to allow it to answer one or more incoming audio stream connections 1 Enter a name for the answering connection and click Next Program Summary 2 Configure the transport settings For IP select the Session Protocol and Audio Port then click Next to configure jitter buffer and FEC settings T Important Note The Return Audio Port is the port used by the local codec to receive audio from the remote codec When Tieline Codecs is the Session Protocol selected using Tieline session data the Return Audio Port is automatically configured as UDP audio port 9000 by default for the first audio stream connection Click to deselect the Any check box to adjust this setting Click to configure e Auto Jitter Adapt and the preferred auto jitter setting using the drop down arrow for Buffer Priority or e Fixed Buffer Level and enter the Jitter Depth which must be between 12ms and 5000ms depending on the algorithm you select e Local and Remote FEC settings if required Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 one Merlin User Manual v 1 4
102. Mix of Outputs 1 amp 2 IFB Rx Decoder 1 Decoder 2 Mix of IFB Tx Inputs 1 amp 2 Encoder 2 Encoder 1 1 x Stereo Peer to Peer IFB Metering This program transmits a bidirectional stereo audio stream and a separate bidirectional mono IFB communications audio stream Outputs 1 amp 2 Decoders 1 amp 2 IFB 2 Tx Rx Decoder 3 Inputs 1 amp 2 IFB 1 Tx Encoders 1 amp 2 Encoder 3 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 EEN Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Adjusting Default PPM Metering The default PPM metering settings can be adjusted via Settings gt Audio gt PPM Mode The options include __ PPM Mode Description sd 1 Program Default default Displays default program PPM meter settings i e the settings described previously for mono stereo programs etc 2 Input Maps input encoders 1 to 6 with PPM meters 1 to 6 3 Decoder Maps decoders 1 to 6 with PPM meters 1 to 6 4 HP Monitor Maps PPM meters to inputs outputs currently selected via the headphone monitoring function The default headphone monitoring setting is accessed va HEADPHONE gt Monitor Source gt Select audio Source PP tiode Decoder HP Monitor Selecting Analog Inputs and Adjusting Input Levels 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Navigate to Audio and press or 3 Inputs are grouped in pairs under Input Type and should be set to Analog press to toggle between Analog and AES3 and press the RETURN button to
103. Mono or Stereo or MP2 J Stereo Note select 32kHz or 48kHz sample rate for MP2 and E apt X depending on available B channels 4 Navigate to a Destination e g Dest 1 or Dest 2 and press the button to select each one in turn Enter the number for each B channel you want to dial and press the button then select which B channel will dial using that number and press the button 5 Navigate down to Auto Reconnect and press the button to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Note This is normally enabled on the dialing codec only ISOM Dial Setuo Press OK to edit Auto Reconr Save as Program 6 Navigate down to Save as Program and press the button to save these settings as a program 7 Navigate down to Module Configuration and press the button ISOM Dial Setup Auto Recon Disabled hodule Configurator 8 Select the ISDN module you want to configure and press the button tdodule Setinas hiodule 1 ISDN 5T Sync Module I5SDN 5T iSync 9 Configure the following settings e Accept gt Voice and Data e Network gt Check with your Telco EU ETSI in Australia Europe amp most countries outside North America US Nat is the most common in the US but check with your Telco e Line Type gt Check with your Telco and select either Point to Multi point to multipoint or Point to Point point to point e DN MSN gt Enter the SPID and DN numbers if required in your region e g a SPID is Tieline Pty Ltd 2
104. Music and e in band RPTP data enabled e n band RPTP data enabled MusicPLUS automatically automatically e Synchronized out of band data can be enabled and disabled All other e Synchronized out of band data e No in band or out of band data algorithms can be enabled and disabled available The codec can be connected to external devices and send RS232 compatible data via the serial port on the rear panel of the codec To enable RS232 data within a connection select Enable Auxiliary Data when creating a program in the Programs panel wizard Alternatively select using the codec Setup menu see Enabling RS232 Data Setting RS232 Data Rates and Flow Control 1 Open the web GUI and click the Settings symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel 2 Click the Options button 3 Click the Baud rate drop down menu arrow to select the serial port baud rate which matches the Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 163 baud rate of the external device connected to the RS232 port on the codec 4 Click to select the Enable flow control check box and enable flow control then click Save settings Important Notes e When connecting to G3 codecs over IP ISDN or POTS only in band data is available via the Music and MusicPLUS algorithms e Use firmware higher than 2 8 xx in the Bridge IT Genie and Merlin families of codecs to enable auxiliary data over multicast connections It is important
105. Navigation Buttons The codec has four arrow shaped navigation buttons for navigating codec menus and adjusting levels and an OK button for selecting menu items Dialing Keypad The keypad has alpha numeric buttons plus star and hatch pound buttons which can be used to enter contact and program information into the codec Operation Button Descriptions Features Operation Button Descriptions Return Button Press to move back through menus amp delete characters Function Button 1 Press to activate codec user functions CE2 Function Button 2 Press to activate codec user functions E Connect Button Press to create an IP connection J Home Button Press to return to home screen Li Information Button Press to view a help menu onscreen G Settings Button Press to adjust codec settings E Disconnect Button Disconnect Button Disconnect Button Press to end a connection a A J Headphone Button Press to adjust headphone audio levels side Reset Button Press to reboot the codec Reset Adjusting LCD Screen Contrast Levels 1 Press and hold the button and then press and release the arrow up button to display the Contrast adjustment screen 2 Use the left lt and right gt arrow buttons to adjust the LCD screen contrast until viewing is optimized Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Ooa Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Home hiy Program amp CHns O 3 Press when you have finished
106. OTS 60 SIP 178 Mono connection metering 22 Mono or Stereo IFB Answer Program K configuration 133 Mono or Stereo IFB Dial Program Keypad backup connections 121 button descriptions 13 configuration 121 function button descriptions 13 enable data 121 Mono Peer to Peer x 2 ai L z backup connections 117 configuration 117 Language selection 80 connections 117 codec menus 46 dual mono audio streams 117 Linear audio 171 MP3 171 Link quality MPEG Layer2 171 IP monitoring 52 Multicasting IP return link quality 52 front panel configuration 65 IP send link quality 52 multicast client programs 65 Lock programs 74 153 Multicasts Logs client program config 138 send logs to Tieline 156 N view event logs 156 ji z Loopback audio 189 LQ 52 Navigating menus howto 15 i M a Navigation howto 15 Maintenance schedule 190 Navigation buttons 13 Manual O a conventions 6 overview 6 Manual Conventions 6 Opto isolated inputs 184 Menus Overview codec menus 15 manual 6 Meters dual mono 22 g P mono connection 22 stereo connection 22 Panel lock 74 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 20 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Peer to Peer Mono Stereo backup connections 108 configuration 108 connections 108 enable data 108 Phantom power 22 Ports 185 POTS about modules 40 about POTS 40 answer config va GUI 102 connection tips 219 deterministic dialing 102 dial and answer routes 102 front panel config 44 front panel module conf
107. R W Community The R W Community identifier allows Read Write level access Configuring SNMP Settings in the Codec Codec Location 1 Open the web GUI and click the Settings symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel 2 Click the Options button at the top of the Settings panel 3 Click in the text boxes to enter SNMP configuration settings Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 156 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ale ees n N P Network a oe ieee ease LLII a oe a ae ph if s ie cane AATE me ii T oe a i aima P p ral 4 Click the Save Settings button to save the new settings MIB Files for SNMP Configuration Management Information Base MIB files are required for SNMP applications to interact with your Tieline codec and interpret SNMP data The codec supports SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 MIB protocols The required MIB files can be downloaded from the codec using the following link in a PC web browser connected to the same network as your codec e http lt YOUR_CODEC_ADDRESS gt mibs tieline mibs zip Save the zip file to your PC and import the contents into the MIB browser you use to manage SNMP enabled network devices Important Note The codec supports the attributes specified in the MIB II standard Please verify that your SNMP software contains the required files as specified in RFC 1213 20 21 Download Logs The codec is capable of providing diagnostic information
108. Setinas System 2 Navigate to the module you want to configure and press the button Note Module 1 is on the left when viewing the codec rear panel Wodule Setinas Module 2 3 Complete configuration changes as per the following options and then navigate up to Apply Settings and press the button to apply all module settings Module Site Settings Answer Mode Affects Answering Only Answer Mode selects how the selected module in the codec will be able to answer incoming POTS line calls Options include e POTS Codec allows the POTS G5 module to receive encoded audio data over a POTS line e Analog Phone configures the POTS G5 module to receive a standard analog phone call e Disabled disables the POTS G5 module from receiing a POTS Codec or Analog Phone call Calls are answered based on the settings in Config 1 amp 2 via Settings gt Answering gt POTS Answer Configs Adjustments to these Config settings are not normally necessary when connecting between Tieline codecs Default settings may need to be adjusted when connecting to non Tieline codecs over POTS see POTS Answering Configuration for more info tdoduyle POTS Ready Apply Settings fat BEL d i ti E d F m T 5 Cc a d PC Maximum Bit rate Affects Dialing and Answering The default setting for the Max Bitrate is 28800 28 8kbps and this only affects POTS Codec calls The range of the setting is 9 6kbps to 33 6kbps Even if the line is cap
109. Streams Studio Codec Answers 2 x Mono POTS Calls Merlin at Remote Site 1 Bidirectional mono remote audio 1 Merlin PLUS g Studio Codec F Network Bidirectional mono remote audio 2 e ame aw E ossa LALO Merlin at Remote Site 2 Bidirectional remote audio 2 Answer Routes for Non Tieline POTS Codecs In some situations you may receive a call from a non Tieline POTS codec which doesn t support Dial Route tags In this situation you can still specify the audio stream Route on the answering codec using Config 1 or 2 in POTS Answer You can also select the default algorithm For example if a call from a non Tieline codec is received va POTS Module 1 i e no Dial Route has been specified in the dialing codec 1 Select an answering Route for this POTS module in one of the two Configs within POTS Answer e g Route1 then select the default Encoding algorithm to use when connecting Note Other is used for connecting to Comrex POTS codecs 2 Click Save Settings to store the new Config settings 3 This will associate the incoming call with a corresponding Answer Route configured in the answering codec program e g Answer Route 1 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 105 20 4 Configuring Input Output Settings Click the Inputs button to view input controls available within the Toolbox web GuUI gt Important Note 15 volt phantom power can only be su
110. Studio Studio IP Streaming Setup for Tieline Audio Codecs The following instructions are intended to help you configure your internet connection and Tieline codecs at the studio to enable incoming calls over the internet from a remote Tieline codec It is assumed that you have a basic understanding of your IP network and how to configure IP devices If you have limited IT network knowledge we recommend you engage the services of an IT professional to install the public IP address and perform the Network Address Translation NAT and port forwarding between the public internet and your private Local Area Network LAN at the studio Prerequisites The following procedures are valid for e All firmware versions in the Genie and Merlin codec families e All Bridge IT Basic and Pro and Bridge IT XTRA codecs with firmware release v 2 x or higher e All Commander G3 and i Mix G3 codecs Getting Started at the Studio To perform a typical codec installation at the studio you will need to 1 Contact your Internet Service Provider and organize a dedicated high speed broadband connection at the studio for your codec with a public static IP address Do not share this connection with other devices 2 Install your codec at the studio and attach an active RJ 45 LAN cable to the LAN or Ethernet port on the rear of the codec Please note e The green LED underneath the LAN or Ethernet port will illuminate and the orange LED will fla
111. T sync Module2 i5DN 5T iSync 9 Configure the following settings e Accept gt Voice and Data e Network gt Check with your Telco EU ETSI in Australia Europe amp most countries outside North America US Nat is the most common in the US but check with your Telco e Line Type gt Check with your Telco and select either Point to Multi point to multipoint or Point to Point point to point e DN MSN gt Enter the SPID and DN numbers if required in your region e g a SPID is normally required in the US 10 Navigate up to Apply Settings and press the button Dialing from the Tieline Codec Program Dialing 1 If you have saved the ISDN program as previously instructed press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt Programs 2 Select the saved program you want to load and press the button Select Load and press the button to load the program 4 Press the CONNECT button to dial the ISDN program connections 1 Ad Hoc Dialing 1 If you haven t save the program but have entered the dialing numbers and other settings press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN gt Connect Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 212 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 2 Press the button to dial using the settings previously entered A Important Note If you select different algorithm settings on each codec and dial from the S Tieline codec the connection will be unsu
112. T Ltd e file 2 clause BSD license clause 3 removed o Copyright c Ian F Darwin 1986 1987 1989 1990 1991 1992 1994 1995 o Software written by Ian F Darwin and others o maintained 1994 Christos Zoulas o This software is not subject to any export provision of the United States Department of Commerce and may be exported to any country or planet e glibc o Code incorporated from 4 4 BSD Copyright C 1991 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved oOo Sun RPC support from rpcsrc 4 0 Copyright c 2010 Oracle America Inc e htop o Copyright c 2004 2006 The Trustees of Indiana University and Indiana University Research and Technology Corporation All rights reserved o Copyright c 2004 2005 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved o Copyright c 2007 Cisco Systems Inc All rights reserved o Portions Copyright c 2004 2005 The University of Tennessee and The University of Tennessee Research Foundation All rights reserved o Portions Copyright c 2004 2005 High Performance Computing Center Stuttgart University of Stuttgart All rights reserved o Portions Copyright c 2006 2007 Advanced Micro Devices Inc All rights reserved e less 2 clause BSD license clause 3 removed o Copyright C 1984 2011 Mark Nudelman e libpcre o Basic Library Functions Copyright c 1997 2010 University of Cambridge All rights reserved o C Wrapper Functions Copyrigh
113. Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 120 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 i Important Note When Tieline Codecs is the Session Protocol selected using Tieline session data the Return Audio Port is automatically configured as UDP audio port 9010 by default for the second audio stream connection Click to deselect the Automatic check box to adjust this setting A codec dialing this connection and using the port specified will always be routed to output 2 on the codec receiving the call Click to configure e Auto Jitter Adapt and the preferred auto jitter setting using the drop down arrow for Buffer Priority or e Fixed Buffer Level and enter the Jitter Depth which must be between 12ms and 5000ms depending on the algorithm you select e Local and Remote FEC settings if required ISDN module answering settings are used if you select ISDN as the connection transport For more details see Configuring ISDN Answering POTS module answering settings are used if you select POTS as the connection transport For more details see Configuring POTS Answering 8 Continue through the steps in the wizard to complete configuration in the same way as the first connection was configured Click Save Program at the end of this process The newly created program will be displayed in the left pane within the Programs panel and in the Master panel When this program is loaded any codec dialing in using IP1 using default Tieline IP port settings will be routed to outpu
114. Tieline T4 The Codec Company Merlin IP ISDN POTS Codec User Manual Software Version 2 14 xx Manual Version 1 4_ 20141219 December 2014 2 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Table of Contents Part Warnings amp Safety Information 9 Part Il How to Use the Documentation 6 Part Ill Glossary of Terms 7 Part IV Getting to know Merlin 9 Part V Rear Panel Connections 11 Part VI Merlin Front Panel Controls 13 Part VII Navigating Menus 15 Part VIII Merlin Input Levels and PPMs 22 Part IX Configuring AES3 Audio 28 Part X Merlin Headphone Aux Output 30 Part XI Inserting Hardware Modules 32 Part XII About ISDN Modules 33 1 ISDN Module SCtINGS sisciesececectsccceiteestistecacecietineveitnececesteenciussiceaitecedecestbeesietarerecsettiacsin 34 2 ISDN Answering Configuration ccsccccscsseeseeeeeescneescnenseeenensceeaseeeneesenensoneaseesaseesnenses 37 Part XIII About POTS Modules 40 T POTS Module Settings s rino aa aa alee 41 2 POTS Answering Configuration ssssssnunsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 44 Part XIV Language Selection 46 Part XV About Program Dialing 47 Part XVI Multiple Stream Programs 49 Part XVII Mono or Stereo IFB Programs 49 Part XVIII Getting Connected Quickly 49 1 Steps to Connect over IP cumpen a a a a 50 2 Monitoring IP CONNECUONS sivicsrionria teases a a a a aa 52 3 Steps to CONNECE over ISDN sorsra aaa aAA SEa ENDE EENE 55 4 Monitoring ISDN Connecti
115. Timeout this shouldn t need to be adjusted from the default setting Click to select Activate Account and click the Save Settings button to create the account in the codec Settings Saved is displayed in the bottom left corner of the Settings panel if the account details are saved successfully O B W Po a Network Options Audio Firmware Licensing Reset Se ap 060 5060 Ue ea WN ae ae UWE 6 Enable SIP within the codec via the SETTINGS button then navigate to SIP gt Accounts gt Select Account name gt Active Enabled After selecting Enabled press the RETURN button to navigate backwards and make sure that the codec has been registered to the SIP server account by checking the registration symbol appears as per the following example SIP Accounts na TielineTestiaiptel org D Important Notes Some ISPs may block SIP traffic over UDP port 5060 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 143 20 11 Configure Peer to Peer SIP Programs SIP programs are like a normal IP program to configure with two small differences entering a SIP address and selecting SIP as the Session Protocol Important Notes Before you start program configuration please note lt e You cannot edit a program when it is currently loaded in the codec e Some drop down menus and settings may be greyed out intentionally depending on features available e Failover and SmartStream PLUS redundant streami
116. User Manual v 1 4 Robert Heath Jonathan Hudson Paul Kienitz David Kirschbaum Johnny Lee Onno van der Linden Igor Mandrichenko Steve P Miller Sergio Monesi Keith Owens George Petrov Greg Roelofs Kai Uwe Rommel Steve Salisbury Dave Smith Christian Spieler Antoine Verheijen Paul von Behren Rich Wales Mike White This software is provided as is without warranty of any kind express or implied In no event shall Info ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct indirect incidental special or consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions in documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Altered versions including but not limited to ports to new operating systems existing ports with new graphical interfaces and dynamic shared or static library versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info ZIP
117. User Manual v 1 4 167 20 25 Upgrading Codec Firmware To download the latest codec firmware visit htto www tieline com Support Latest Firmware Manual Firmware Upgrades The following procedure explains how to perform codec firmware upgrades with a downloaded firmware file saved to your PC 1 Click the Settings symbol at the top of the web GUI screen if the Settings panel is not displayed 2 Click Firmware Network Options Audio SIP Modules ISDN Answer POTS Answer 3 Click Update from a selected file and click the Select File button 4 Select the bin file you are using to perform the upgrade and click Open 5 Press the Update Firmware button to commence the upgrade Automatic Firmware Upgrades By default the web GUI application integrates with TieServer to automatically update users when a firmware upgrade is available 1 Connect your codec to your PC using either a LAN or USB connection and open the web GUI program See Connecting to the Web GUI 2 If new software is available the Update symbol appears in the top left hand side of the screen 3 Position your mouse pointer over the Update symbol and click the update dialog when it appears to download the new software New updates are available N x Click to download and install them from TieServer 4 Click More Information in the Updating firmware dialog to display details of the upgrade process This might take several minutes Y Mo
118. a network administrator Static Private IP LAN Administrator Address Obtaining Public IP Addresses To send audio streams over the public internet you need to use a public IP address assigned to you by your ISP Internet Service Provider A public IP address is like your public telephone number and allows you to be contacted over the internet in much the same way people dial your public telephone number They come in two forms dynamic DHCP and static Most ISPs assign a dynamic public IP address by default which can often change without you knowing This is suitable for a quick demo of your Tieline codec but for a permanent installation you will need to request a permanent static public IP address Once the Static Public IP address is assigned to your internet connection router at the studio you need to create a link between the public IP address and your codec s private IP address on the LAN This is called Network Address Translation Depending upon how your network is configured it may also be possible to simply connect your Tieline codec directly into your ADSL modem router and receive a public address from the router Private LAN IP Addresses By default your Tieline codec will normally be automatically assigned a private IP address when you connect it to a typical router over a LAN Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 198 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Private IP Addresses are associated with LANs and normally resi
119. able of establishing a connection at a higher bit rate the Max Bitrate setting is the highest bit rate that will be attempted G5 POTS modems initially attempt to establish a link at the default bit rate of 28 8kbps or the highest possible bit rate to suit the prevailing line quality at each end of the link This process of training analyzes the line and compensates for frequency and phase response It also cancels Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 43 out any echo that may be present The codec will then renegotiate the link downwards to the highest possible bit rate where line quality is greater than 70 Negotiation is the process of bit rate adjustment Reducing this value can improve connection reliability on poor quality lines If two codecs are not configured the same they will attempt to connect at the lowest of the two Max Bit rate settings tdodule2 POTS Ready hias Bitrate 28500 sp Dial Tone Detect ait for Dial Tone Dialing Method Affects Dialing only Use this menu to select Tone DIMF or Pulse dialing over POTS Codec connections Tone dialing is used always when the Answer Mode is Analog Phone Dial Tone Detect Affects Dialing only There are two settings in this menu e Dial Tone Detect The module will only be allowed to dial when a dial tone is present on the line e Blind Dialing Allows the module to dial when no dial tone is present Monitor Modem Tone Affec
120. abled Note This is normally enabled on the dialing codec only Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ISOM Dial Setuo Press OK to edit Auto Reconr Save as Program 13 At this point we recommend you save a program to simplify dialing and to store this configuration for future use Use the up navigation button to select Save as Program and press the button ISOM Dial Setuo 92499996 from Any Save as Program 14 Use the numeric KEYPAD to name the program then press i to save the program Save Program Press OK to save 15 It is possible to dial the B channels associated with this audio stream from this menu Use the up navigation button to select Connect and press to connect 16 When dialing the CONNECTED LED on the front of the unit will flash green When connected the CONNECTED LED on the front of the unit will illuminate solid green D Important Note To load a saved program and dial press the HOME button navigate to Programs select the program you want to dial and press the CONNECT button to load the program and dial 18 4 Monitoring ISDN Connections Each new audio stream connection becomes visible in the Cxns menu va the Home screen 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen 2 Use the navigation buttons to select Cxns and press the button 3 If a single ISDN audio stream is connected the Connected ISDN screen will display details of the active ISDN connectio
121. ad speed Is the connection shared at either end Your bit rates FEC settings and buffer rates must be pre configured at both ends before you connect so it s always better to set your connection speed and balance your FEC according to the available uplink bandwidth at each end for best performance As an example if you want 15 kHz mono using the Tieline Music Algorithm you will need at least a 24kbps connection for audio Adding 100 FEC will add another 24kbps making your bit rate 48kbps plus some overhead of around 10kbps is required If you re on a 64kbps uplink you should consider reducing your FEC to minimize the likelinood of exceeding your bandwidth capacity Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 asa Merlin User Manual v 1 4 21 5 21 6 Here is another example if you want 15 kHz stereo you need at least 56kbps for the audio 100 FEC requires at least 112kbps and 50 FEC requires at least 84kbps If your uplink speed is 256kbps and you re on a shared connection then choosing a lower FEC setting of 20 33 may give you better results Conserving Bandwidth with FEC There is a trade off between the quality and the reliability of an IP connection particularly when FEC is activated on your codecs However it is possible in certain situations to set different FEC on each codec to match connection bandwidth requirements at either end of the link conserve bandwidth and create more stable IP connections For example if your broadcas
122. and BlueBox codecs then press the button POTS Answer Conta 1 Alaonthm tdusic Mone A Important Note On the Comrex codec select its Music algorithm Please note that 9 6kbps connections are not supported by the Comrex codecs 7 lf required you can specify the audio stream Route when answering a call from a non Tieline codec then press the button POTS Answer Confia 1 Route O o Route 2 Poute 3 8 Select Yes and press the button to confirm the new Config settings POTS Answer Confia 1 Confirm Changes Save POTS Answer Contig 17 9 The new Config will be displayed showing the updated settings Pots Answer Contas Contig 1 todule1 Other 32k Sessionless Conta 2 hodule2 Music hono Tieline Codecs Reset Pots Answer Configs Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 46 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Reset POTS Answer Configs To reset POTS answering settings to factory defaults 1 Navigate to Settings gt Answering gt POTS Answer Configs gt Reset POTS Answer Configs and then press the button Pots Answer Contas Config 1 Module 1 Other 32k Sessionless Contig 2 hodule2 Music hono Teline Codecs Reset Pots Answer Configs 2 Select Yes and press the button Reset POTS Answer Reset POTS Answer Setup 14 Language Selection English is the default language in the codec To select a new language 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Navigate to System and press for 3 Use the
123. and Noise lt 0 000056 Digital Analog Signal To gt 98 5dB at 22dBu unweighted Noise Ratio Sample Frequencies IP a 16kKHz 32KHz 44 1kKHz 48kHz Frequencies a Algorithms IP Tieline Music Tieline MusicPLUS G 711 G 722 MPEG 1 Layer 2 MP3 LC AAC HE AAC and HE AACv2 AAC LD AAC ELD Opus 16 24 bit aptX Enhanced IP uncompressed Linear PCM16 24 bit 48kHz sampling Data and Control Interfaces USB USB 2 0 Host port on the front panel LAN 2 x 10 100 1000 RJ45 connectors Advanced Networking VLAN tagging IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p Serial RS232 up to 115kbps with or without CTS RTS flow control via female DB9 connector can be used as a proprietary data channel Protocols Supported Tieline DHCP SNMP DNS HTTP IGMP ICMP VLAN IPv4 v6 FEC SIP SDP EBU NACIP Tech 3326 compliant RTP IBP EBU3347 compliant ISDN va module Optional via module slot POTS via module Optional via module slot Front Panel Interfaces Display 256 x 64 monochrome LCD Keypad 21 button keypad Navigation 5 button keypad General Size 1U x 19 Rackmount Dimensions 19 x 1 75 x 13 5 482mm W x 44mm H x 348mm D including rear connectors Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 233 Weight 6lb 7 702z 2 94Kg Power Consumption Dual AC 100 240V IEC power inlets 1A 50 60Hz Operating Temp O to 45T 32 to 113 F Humidity Operating 20 l
124. b GUI 162 configuration via codec 184 flow control va web GUI 162 RS232 wiring 234 Rules Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Rules control port configuration 163 Ss Sessionless ISDN Answer routes 216 SIP configure SIP programs 143 configuring SIP settings 141 dialing SIP addresses 65 multiple SIP call config 146 peer to peer connections 64 SDP 141 session description protocol 141 SIP server configuration 141 SIP ports 185 Site port setting 185 SmartStream 72 SNMP configuring settings 155 downloading MIB files 155 front panel config 189 setting descriptions 155 Software upgrades 16 7 Software Licences 223 Specifications 232 Speed dialing 62 Static IP addresses 168 Stereo Connection metering 22 Studio Codec Installation installation procedures 191 port forwarding 191 testing 191 troubleshooting 191 Sync input 11 TCP port settings 185 Test mode 189 Testing IP connections 200 Testing ISDN connections 202 Tieline Music 171 Tieline MusicPLUS 171 Tieline session port 185 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 ToolBox connecting to a codec 76 Trademarks 231 Troubleshooting IP connection tips 199 U UDP port settings 185 Understanding IP networks 197 Unlock programs 74 153 Upgrades firmware 167 software 16 7 USB 2 host pot 13 VLAN Configuration 88 W Warnings amp safety information digital phone systems 5 earth leakage 5 supplementary ground 5 thunderstorms and lightning 5 Web Browse
125. be substituted to replace them Note FEC should not be confused with SmartStream PLUS FEC packets are sent over a single data stream connection whereas SmartStream PLUS dual redundant streaming transmits two completely redundant audio data streams FEC is also a subset of features within SmartStream PLUS which means you can configure SmartStream PLUS dual redundant data streams and also configure FEC on each of these data streams For more info on FEC see Configuring Forward Error Correction Auto Reconnect Auto Reconnect is the simplest form of connection backup whereby the codec will redial a lost connection continuously until it is either e Re established or e Dialing is manually stopped Auto reconnect can be enabled when configuring a codec program designed to dial another codec or codecs See the procedures for configuring different programs using_the web GUI for more configuration details Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 18 20 Lock or Unlock a Program in the Codec 18 21 It is possible to lock a loaded custom program in a codec to ensure the currently loaded program type e g mono cannot be unloaded by a codec dialing in with a different program type e g stereo For example if your routing requirements require the codec at the studio to always connect in mono simply load and lock a mono program in the codec On the answering codec you may wish to configure the codec to always use a particular
126. betw een announcers is required Ideal for STLs and audio distribution w here high connection bandw idth rates e Highly cascade resilient is available and very low delay is highly desirable e Resilient w ith multiple encodes decodes w hen required Opus Voice is ideal for high quality and low delay voice quality remotes at extremely low bit rates e Opus Mono and Opus Stereo are perfect for high fidelity remotes STLs and audio distribution at higher bit rates 176 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 24bit 48kHz Opus 4Hz 20ms 9 6 256kops_ 16kbps 20kHz Algorithm Selection Guide e Very high quality voice and music e Very low delay at low bit rates Algorithm Very Low Moderate Excellent Preferred Preferred for Highly Delay Performance for Live STLs and Com patible at Low Remotes Audio with other Distribution Codecs Linear PCM Y Opus vA Tieline Music vA Tieline MusicPLUS vA apt X Enhanced vA LC AAC S Z HE AACv1 S S HE AACv2 Y z Y AAC LD Y S S AAC ELD of S S AAC ELDv2 va Y S MPEG Layer 2 SY Y S MPEG Layer 3 vA vA G 722 G 711 Use with caution for remotes due to high delay not suitable when bidirectional communications is requ
127. bit rates Pending release 128kbps 80kbps minimum 16bit 32kHz to 288kbps and music e Low delay at low bit rates Very high quality voice and music e Extremely low delay at high bit tobe 1 eae High quality voice High quality voice High quality voice High quality voice High quality voice High quality remotes STLs and audio distribution Use w hen bidirectional communication betw een announcers is not required Voice or music remotes as wellas STLs and audio distribution w here some delay is tolerable Tieline Music or MusicPLUS deliver low er delay Live voice or music remotes as wellas STLs and audio distribution w ith limited connection bandw idth Use w hen bidirectional communication betw een announcers is not required Used for DAB radio streaming ideal for low bit rate remotes Use w hen bidirectional communication betw een announcers is not required Very high quality very low delay STLs and audio distribution Remote connections able to achieve 48kbps for each audio channel requiring Suitable w hen bidirectional communication betw een announcers is required Great for live voice or music remotes Suitable w hen bidirectional communication betw een announcers is required Great for live voice or music remotes w here limited connection bandw idth is available Suitable w hen bidirectional communication
128. blocked by a firewall at either point C or D in the preceding diagram If the remote codec Send LQ reading is 01 then the outgoing audio from the remote codec is being blocked by a firewall at either point A or B in the preceding diagram Troubleshooting TCP Port Blocking Error messages on the codec screen can help to diagnose TCP port blocking 1 Connection Refused usually means that the firewall is configured correctly but the codec is not using the expected port For example the firewall is set up to forward wa port 9002 but codec is listening to port 10 000 Connection Refused is not normally shown if the firewall is not configured correctly because a firewall will by design silently drop any forwarding requests to ports that it doesn t have open see next point Note Connection Refused will also be displayed if the Commander G3 or i Mix G3 codec you are calling is already connected 2 Connection Timeout can mean one of two things e The firewall is not configured correctly and the attempted codec connection is being Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 196 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 silently dropped e g a remote codec is dialing to port 9002 but the studio firewall port forwarding is not configured e The UDP port is not port forwarded correctly Tieline codecs send test data during connection establishment to make sure that the audio path is configured correctly if this process fails then it will also result in a
129. c This ensures inbound calls from multiple codecs can be consistently routed to the same answering codec audio streams and therefore the same inputs and outputs Following is an example of how to consistently route incoming ISDN audio streams using dial and answer routes 2 x Mono Peer to Peer ISDN Audio Streams Studio Codec Answers 2 x Mono ISDN Answer nput Outpu Route 1 1 Bidirectional mono Dial Route 1 Merlin at Remote Site 1 remote audio 1 Merlin PLUS g Studio Codec Bidirectional mono remote audio 2 Arsi Answer Dial Route 2 z peer i Bidirectional Merlin at Remote Site 2 remote audio 2 Answer Routes for Non Tieline Sessionless ISDN Calls In some situations you may receive a call from a non Tieline codec which doesn t support session data and Dial Route tags In this situation you can still specify the audio stream Route on the answering codec using Config 1 4 in ISDN Answer You can also select the default algorithm For example if a call from a non Tieline codec is received va B Channel 1 on Module 1 i e no Dial Route has been specified in the dialing codec 1 Select a Route for this B channel in one of the four Configs within ISDN Answer e g Route1 then select the default Encoding algorithm to use when connecting default setting is G 722 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 2 Click Save Settings to store the new Config settings 3 This
130. c with default Non Tieline ISDN Codec Sessionless ISDN Module Answer Config Settings i l ll No Session Data Sent Sessionless ISDN call made by remote codec Tieline codec is Pa i a unable to p a rf gt L a Kosata m Tieline studio codec receives lt gt Wi IO o E answer and no info about how to manage route the call e Sessionless call the incoming call Incoming ISDN call likely to fail because the answering codec has not been configured with ISDN Answer Config Settings like algorithm used by dialing codec and answer route setting e No Algorithm settings sent e No Dial Route setting sent It is possible to save up to four different ISDN Answer Configs which allow up to 4 ISDN B channels to be individually configured for unique answering behavors ISDN answering can be configured to suit e Hardware available in the codec i e the number of B channels available e Expected dialing behaviors e g if B channels should bond or not and whether audio streams need to use Dial and Answer Route tags e The type of call being received by the codec e g Tieline with Tieline Session Data versus non Tieline sessionless calls e The algorithm expected when receiving sessionless calls Each of the four available Configs allows you to select which B channel or channels are used to answer a call or calls from incoming ISDN codecs A maximum of up to 4 B channels can be selected if 2 ISDN module
131. calls It may be necessary to make an analog call to dial a telephone hybrid or to use for communications or because there is no Tieline codec at the other end of the link Remember analog voice calls are only 3 kHz audio quality To select analog phone answering mode in a POTS G5 module navigate to Settings gt Modules gt POTS gt Answer Mode Analog phone Important Analog Phone Note The codec has a single analog phone input which is shared by two POTS G5 modules when installed As a result two concurrent analog phone connections are not recommended because both connections share the same input and audio will be accepted from the oldest active connection only re POTS Module Settings POTS settings in the Module menu determine how your codec behaves at a particular site This allows you to copy programs between codecs installed at different locations and configure site specific settings for how each module should connect Other answering related settings are available in the Answering menu via Settings gt Answering gt Select POTS Config if you are connecting to non Tieline codecs over POTS Important Notes When Module Ready is displayed throughout POTS menus it means o the POTS module has initialized and is ready to accept or make a call How to Configure POTS G5 Modules 1 Press the the SETTINGS button then navigate to Modules and press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 a2 Merlin User Manual v 1 4
132. ccessful and the CONNECTED LED on the front panel of the Tieline codec will continuously flash Adjust the algorithm settings and attempt to reconnect Dialing from the Zephyr Xstream RON OD 22 7 9 A Important Note Configure ISDN Answer Config settings in the codec before attempting to dial from the Xstream to the Tieline codec Select the following settings in the Tieline codec in one of the Configs see ISDN Answering Configuration for more detail May bond Sessionless Algorithm G 722 or MP2 Mono or MP2 Stereo Sample Rate 48kHz Press the Dial button once Use the keypad to enter the number of the line you are dialing Press the Dial button again to make the outgoing call from the Xstream The codec screen will briefly display Outgoing Ring and then Conn is displayed after a successful connection If you are making a stereo connection and need to dial the second line press the Dial button again and a screen for Line 2 is displayed Use the keypad to enter the second number and press the Dial button again The TEL screen will briefly display Outgoing Ring and then Conn is displayed after a successful connection Two ISDN B Channels Connected A Important Note When dialing a stereo connection over two ISDN B lines audio is not heard until the second connection is successful Connecting to Comrex Matrix ISDN To connect your Tieline codec to a Comrex Matr
133. ck settings 105 phantom power 22 quick adjustment of levels 22 renaming 105 setting levels 105 Intelligent gain control 22 Introduction 9 Introduction to the web GUI IP testing 200 IP address configuration 168 details 168 DHCP 168 IPv4 IPV6 168 Static 168 IP addresses 168 IP and USB backup 72 IPv4 address configuration IPv4 IPV6 168 IPv6 address configuration ISDN about modules 33 bonding 37 94 80 88 88 connect to non Tieline codecs 202 connecting to APT 202 connecting to CDQ Prima 204 connecting to Comrex Matrix 212 connecting to Mayah 208 connecting to Zephyr Xstream 210 considerations 33 default answering config default answering settings deterministic dialing dial and answer route tags Directory Numbers 92 DN 92 front panel module config 94 GUI answering config GUI configuration 91 GUI module config 92 module config via GUI module settings 34 monitoring connections MSN 92 94 3 37 94 34 92 57 Multiple Subscriber Number 92 network types 34 non Tieline codecs 37 94 sessionless calls 216 SPID 92 testing 202 U and S T interfaces Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 ISDN Modules using answer routes 216 inserting removing 3 2 Monitoring g J J headphone outputs 30 headphones 30 Jitter buffer IP connection statistics 52 algorithms 178 IP link quality 52 automatic 178 IP packet reliability 52 configuration 178 ISDN 57 fixed 178 P
134. connection or SmartStream PLUS for this audio stream recommended Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 130 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Note The default Send Audio Port is 9010 for this IP audio stream If you connect multiple remote codecs simultaneously to a Merlin PLUS codec at the studio when creating 2 x Mono or Stereo Peer to Peer IFB connections use Send Audio Port 9030 to configure the second IFB connection at the studio IFB audio over this audio stream connection will be routed via audio input output 6 on the studio Merlin PLUS codec Click the drop down arrows on the right hand side of each text box to adjust the Encoding Sample rate and Bit rate options Se _ z p gt i a rma m j Music Mono a am i 7 mt E K iL 43 kbps Click the check box to select Enable Redundant SmartStream PLUS and configure dual Ethernet SmartStream IP streaming Alternatively click Next to configure Auto Reconnect or a backup connection whereby the alternative connection is dialed if the primary connection fails By default primary IP streaming is va ETH1 To achieve the maximum level of redundancy select Secondary to configure redundant streaming from the secondary IP port ETH2 The redundant stream uses Send Audio Port 9011 by default and provides automatic IP streaming backup in case one IP connection fails Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 131 Important Note Dual SmartStream PLUS redu
135. connections For the purposes of this example dialing is excluded in configuring a stereo and mono IFB stream Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 135 Program Summary It is also possible to select an Answer Route if required When routing multiple audio streams over transports like ISDN or POTS you can use Dial and Answer Routes to configure deterministic routing of audio streams Use of Dial and Answer Routes is not recommended over IP See Configuring ISDN Answering or Configuring POTS Answering for more information Use the default settings for IP connections 4 Enter the connection name in the text box then click Next 5 Configure the transport settings For IP click the drop down Session Protocol menu and select Tieline Codecs and ensure the Any check box is not selected then click Next D Important Note The Return Audio Port is the port used by the local codec to receive audio from the remote codec When Tieline Codecs is the Session Protocol selected using Tieline session data the Return Audio Port is automatically configured as UDP audio port 9000 by default for the first audio stream Click to deselect the Any check box to adjust this setting Click to configure e Auto Jitter Adapt and the preferred auto jitter setting using the drop down arrow for Buffer Priority or e Fixed Buffer Level and enter the Jitter Depth which must be between 12ms and 5000ms depending on the algorithm
136. ction with the remote codec until Disconnect is pressed either on the dialing codec s keypad or in the web GUI W Auto Reconnect using IP 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen select Connect then select IP and press the button 2 Select the IP Session mode you are using to connect 3 Select Setup and press ox 4 Navigate to Auto Recon and press to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Auto Reconnect using ISDN 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen select Connect then select ISDN and press the button 2 Navigate to Auto Recon and press to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Auto Reconnect using POTS 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen select Connect then select POTS and press the button 2 Select Setup and press for 3 Navigate to Auto Recon and press to toggle between Enabled and Disabled 18 11 Speed Dialing Connections Assigning Speed Dial Numbers 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen 2 Use the navigation buttons to select Programs and press the button 3 Navigate to the program you want to assign a speed number to and press the button 4 Navigate to Speed Dial and press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 63 Program Studia 1 5 Navigate to the program you want to assign a speed dial number then press the button 6 A confirmation message will display the number assigned s Succ
137. ctional encoding 184 unidirectional encoding 184 DB15 234 DB9 234 Default password new web GUI password 79 Default ports 185 Default profiles 71 DHCP IP addresses 168 Dial and disconnect dial an audio stream 147 dial multiple audio streams 14 7 disconnect an audio stream 14 7 disconnect individual IP stream 147 disconnect multiple IP streams 14 7 Dialing default algorithm profiles 69 disconnecting 61 hanging up 61 how to connect 50 how to connect ISDN 55 POTS dialing 58 speed dialing 62 Disconnecting 61 DNS settings 88 DSCP configuration 154 187 Dual mono connection metering 22 B Encode Decode Direction 184 Ethernet ports 11 a an Factory default settings restoration va web GUI 150 Factory defaults restore via front panel 188 Fail over how it works 72 FCC compliance 221 237 238 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Features 9 FEC configuration 182 how it works 182 Firmware upgrades 167 Forward error correction configuration 182 FEC 182 how it works 182 Front Panel Controls 13 G 711 171 G 722 171 Ganging inputs 22 Glossary 7 GPIOs 163 Ground terminal 11 GUl ports 185 H Hanging up a connection 61 Headphone out 11 Headphones monitoring audio 30 output levels 30 stereo connections 30 Help button 6 IGC 22 Inputs adjusting input levels 22 analog 105 audio metering 22 digital AES3 105 ganging 22 105 IGC 22 IGC Auto Level 22 intelligent gain control 22 lo
138. ctory default settings within the codec Function Description ______ a Reset Audio and Click to restore factory default settings for Audio and Connect Connect Settings menu settings 2l Restore Factory Click to restore factory default settings excluding user defined Defaults programs and call history Delete Programs amp Deletes custom programs and recent calls in the codec speed Call History dial contacts are retained Glick to restart the codeo SSS 4 Reboot Codec Click to restart the codec A Clear Logs codec event and log history Note This should only be performed if instructed to by Tieline support staff Important Note After restoring factory defaults always reboot the codec using the Reboot Codec function not by removing power from the codec 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Use the navigation buttons to select Reset and press the button Tle Serer Licenses 3 Navigate to the preferred option from those available and press the button Reset Functons Reset Audio and Connect Settings Restore Factor Oeteults Delete Programs amp Call Histor 4 Select Yes and press the button to confirm the reset function Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 189 Reset and Restore Factory Defaults using the Web GUI The web GUI can also be used to reset and restore factory defaults See Reset Factory Default Settings for more details 21 10 Configur
139. d connect Other answering related settings are available in the Answering menu wa Settings gt Answering gt Select ISDN Config Configuring ISDN G5 Modules 1 Press the the SETTINGS button then navigate to Modules and press the button Seinas Sytem A Important Note You can also configure your ISDN module by pressing the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN Then use the down w navigation button to select Module Configuration and press the button 2 Navigate to the module you want to configure and press the button Note Module 1 is on the Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 35 left when looking at the codec rear panel tdodule Settinas DED Sr ST osenc Module2 i5SDH 5T rsync Important Note ISDN Sync should be displayed when an ISDN line is connected to the codec This appears regardless of whether you have configured the ISDN Line Type correctly 3 Navigate to Accept and press the button This menu is a call filter to allow or deny voice or data calls according to your preferences The default setting allows both Voice amp Data Select your preferred option and press the button ISDH hoduled Acceot incoming Calls ci Important Note G 711 is the default algorithm for incoming connections when Voice Only is selected There are two G 711 algorithms and the one used by the codec depends on the country setting in the codec
140. d respective audio outputs When data packets are received from remote codecs at a particular public IP address port information is translated from data packets to ensure the correct packets are sent to the correct studio codecs This process is performed by PAT Port Address Translation which is a feature of NAT Network Address Translation devices Tieline codecs use TCP ports for setting up the communication session and UDP ports for streaming audio While TCP ports are generally open UDP ports are generally blocked by network devices which contain firewalls and will stop you delivering your audio Depending on the codecs you are using you need to configure your firewall to allow TCP and UDP protocols to pass through the ports listed in the table below Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 199 22 4 Tips for Creating Reliable IP Connections The following 10 tips are provided to help obtain the best possible IP connection between two codecs without paying for Quality of Service QoS 1 Always use the best quality Internet Service Provider ISP Tier 1 service providers are best as their infrastructure actually makes up the internet backbone Wikipedia lists the major service providers that make up the internet backbone at http en wikipedia org wiki internet_backbone In Australia Telstra is equivalent to one of these service providers 2 You will get the best quality connection if both the local studi
141. de behind a firewall and are not visible to the internet They are generally in the ranges 10 0 0 1 10 255 255 255 169 254 0 0 169 254 255 255 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 and 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 and are assigned by network DHCP servers and routers These IP Addresses are generally assigned for a predefined period known as a lease by your network s DHCP server or router This IP address will generally expire after the lease period DHCP assigned IP Addresses may also change if the device is disconnected for lengthy periods or if power to the device is turned off and back on As a result it is advised that you make this IP address permanent by assigning it as a Static DHCP IP Address This will ensure you are able to always forward incoming audio packets to your codec using the same private IP address at the studio using port forwarding see the section on port forwarding for more details Consult your Network Administrator if you are unsure how to do this Network Address Translation NAT Network Address Translation NAT is a method of connecting multiple devices to the internet using one public IP address The best way to explain NAT is to use the example of a phone system at an office that has one public telephone number and multiple extensions This type of telephone system allows people to call you on a single public telephone number and performs the translation and routing of the public number to a particular privat
142. ded if not available Experiencing browser java plugin problems Consider the following Toolbox Browser Applet No JNLP 1 2 Tieline Codec Management System Need more assistance Please visit the Tieline Support Page 6 Click to launch the ToolBox Web Start Desktop Application recommended Note When you launch for the first time the application will download and launch the desktop Toolbox application Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 that will allow you to configure your codec A desktop shortcut will also be created af Toolbox Desktop Icon 7 When you launch Toolbox an authentication dialog prompts you to enter a password to login The first time you log in you can enter the default setting password and click the OK button Tieline highly recommends you click the hyperlink in the login dialog or visit Changing the Default Password to change the password This will provide better network security to maintain reliability during live broadcasts Authentication Required Tieline4 Enter password to access Tieline on 172 16 113 235 Password seeee8 How can setthe password ci Important Note If you update Java software or clear the Java cache on your computer you will need to repeat the preceding steps If you have trouble launching the web GUI in a browser type http lt insert codec IP address gt htm directly in your browser Using the Web GUI over the Internet If
143. delay is not so critical Unless delay is irrelevant this setting is also not recommended over peaky jitter networks Such as 3G and is best used on more stable networks where large jitter peaks are not as common Best Compromise This default setting is literally the midpoint between the jitter buffer levels that would have been chosen for the Highest Quality and Least Delay settings It is designed to provide the safest level of good audio quality without introducing too much extra delay Good Quality and Less Delay These two settings lie between the mid point setting of Best Compromise and two settings Highest Quality and Least Delay They indicate a slight preference and may assist in achieving better performance from a connection without incurring extreme delays in transmission or packet loss Which Algorithms can use Automatic Jitter Buffering The following table provides an overview of which algorithms are capable of using the automatic jitter buffer feature over SIP and non SIP connections Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 180 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Algorithm Non SIP Connections SIP Connections Linear Uncompressed Tieline Music Tieline MusicPLUS yf G 711 G 722 MPEG Layer 2 MPEG Layer 3 LC AAC HE AAC v4 HE AAC v 2 AACD AAC ELD Opus faptXxEnhanced Configuring Automatic Jitter Buffering Default Setting x j a Press the HOME button to return to the Home scree
144. dio SS ogr Port 9020 Studio Codec 3 Remote codec 2 dials 203 36 205 188 using TCP port 9012 and UDP port 9010 CP Session Port 9012 CP Session Port 9022 Studio Router Firewall Router configured with public static IP address 203 36 205 188 forwards Remote smartphone 3 dials incoming remote audio to 203 36 205 188 using TCP studio codecs 1 2 and 3 port 9022 and UDP port 9020 Port Forwarding to 3 Studio Codecs Sharing a Public Static IP Address g Important Note e The most common studio configuration issue is a firewall which blocks the incoming and or outgoing TCP and UDP ports or not configuring NAT and port forwarding correctly The following table lists the firewall ports you need to open for each model of Tieline codec if they are dialing your router at the studio If the remote codec is also connected to a LAN with a firewall you may also need to open the ports at the remote end of the link to connect successfully e Some firewalls require symmetric port configuration The codec supports configuration of the send audio port codec port at the remote end of the link to which you are sending audio and return audio port port used by the local codec to receive audio from the remote codec Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 193 Firewall Ports Miia Commander G3 i Mix G3 ane eee Bridge IT Bridge IT XTRA ee ne Merlin and Genie Codec SS UDP IP 1 TE PT auo
145. dio Stream 5 IP Wu jm ey oo ap Channel 1 when requi vired lt allows deterministic dialing degias configuration Audio Stream 6 IP using Dial Route 3 and routing of ISDN calls Algorithm settings sent Remote Merlin Codec 4 with ISDN a g the codec sends info e Dial Routes 3 amp 4 sent Session Data Enabled re about the algorithm and e Answering codec routes z n 7 ee Dials ISON Module2 B syesm where to route the judo ISON audio stream using as WHI n o s Channel 2 when required lt gt incoming call at the B annar A Tieline Program s Answer using Dial Route 4 Non Tieline ISDN Codec 3 answering codec Route settings 6 9 34 4 No Session Data Sent _ Audo Dials ISON Module2 B 55 aai 3 saa on anewesing codec ld ag to Ss Channel 1 when required qp Sessioniess ISDN call lt _ configured with I using Dial Route 3 made by remote codec th 3 which Tieline studio codec Nigorim settings Non Tieline ISDN Codec 4 match the dialing codecs receives no info about No Session Data Sent Dials ISON Module 2 8 Auto how TR onc e ISON Answer Config 3 gt i in am 4 ys Srean to manage Steam 4 Aana ROGS E lt lt Channel 2 when required ra incoming call ues using Dial Route 4 Tieline Codec Dialing over IP D A WWIE D z Tieline Codec Dialing over IP e ISON Answer Config 4 uses Answer Route 4 Audio Stream 6 over IP vie Tioine Detautt Audio Port 9050 La ae Ps gt
146. down arrow to adjust the Answer Mode and select how the module in the codec will be able to answer incoming POTS calls Options include e POTS Codec allows the POTS G5 module to receive incoming audio data over a POTS line e Analog Phone configures the POTS G5 module to receive a standard analog phone call e Disabled disables the POTS G5 module from receiving a POTS Codec or Analog Phone call Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 10 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Calls are answered based on the POTS Answer settings in Config 1 amp 2 Adjustments to these Config settings are not normally necessary when connecting between Tieline codecs They are normally adjusted when connecting to non Tieline codecs over POTS see Configuring POTS Answering for more info 5 Click the Max Bitrate drop down arrow to adjust the maximum bit rate dialing and answering The default setting is 28800 28 8kbps and this only affects POTS Codec calls The range of the setting is 9 6kbps to 33 6kbps Even if the line is capable of establishing a connection at a higher bit rate the Max Bitrate setting is the highest bit rate that will be attempted Reducing this value can improve connection reliability on poor quality lines If two codecs are not configured the same they will attempt to connect at the lowest of the two Max Bit rate settings D Important Note G5 POTS modems initially attempt establish a link at the default bit rate of 28 8kbps or the highest po
147. e 1 ISDN B channel e Decoder Independent No 5 Press the right arrow on the Enter button and navgate to Interface Push the down arrow on the Enter button to select this menu 6 Use the Enter button and navigate to the type of interface you are using Note During Tieline tests we used an Internal TA 7 Select the actual terminal adapter connected to your codec Note During Tieline tests we used the internal TA301 8 Use the Enter button and select the switch type for the country you are in Check with your Telco for the correct setting if you are unsure Note During Tieline tests we used the internal NI1 setting for the USA 9 Use the Enter button and keypad to enter the SPID 1 and SPID 2 numbers if required 10 Use the Enter button and keypad to enter the ID 1 and ID 2 Directory MSN numbers if required 11 The codec should now be configured Programming the CDQ Prima for a Stereo Connection Press the SDIAL button on the front panel of the codec When ID NUM is displayed press 27 and then press Enter using the down arrow Zephyr 128K QS will be displayed briefly followed by WORKING OK will be displayed momentarily and then the LCD screen will return to the screen displayed prior to programming The codec is now programmed for e A Joint Stereo connection e 128Kbps Bit Rate e 48K Sample Rate e MPEG Layer 2 algorithm e 2 ISDN B Channels e D
148. e Configuring ISDN Answering for more information on Dial Route and Answer Route tags These are useful when routing multiple audio streams over transports like ISDN Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 56 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Select Dial Route Route 2 Royte 3 6 Select the number of B channels being used for the audio stream connection then press the button Humber of B channels 7 Select an algorithm then press the button Algonthm MP2 tone MP2 Stereo tdusic Mone Music Stereo 8 Select the sample rate if required then press the button Samole Rate 9 Select Destination 1 and press the button then use the numeric KEYPAD to enter the ISDN number you want to dial and use the RETURN button to delete any numbers already entered Then press the button ISOM Dial Setuo Destination 1 Humber Connect 92499999 Tielin Codecs MP2 Stereo 32k 128kbps Press OK to edit 10 Select the preferred B channel to use when dialing and press the button Preferred Device hodule1 B Any 11 If you are dialing over multiple B channels to create a bonded connection select the next destination e g Destination 2 and use the numeric KEYPAD to enter the next ISDN number you want to dial Do this for all B channel destinations ISOM Dial Setup Tieline Codecs Music Plus Stereo 45k 128kbps Press OK to edit 12 Navigate down to Auto Reconnect and press the button to toggle between Enabled and Dis
149. e Transport e SIP from the Session Protocol menu option Then click Next Pa F ign 6 Configure the destination codec Address then specify the network interface used to dial the connection e g Primary Ethernet port 1 At this point you can click Save Program and save the program with default algorithm and jitter settings Alternatively click Next to confirm and specify algorithm and jitter settings for this connection and configure backup audio settings recommended Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 145 Important Notes e f your codec is registered with same SIP registrar as the destination codec then you only need to enter the SIP user name to dial successfully e The default UDP audio port when using SIP for a peer to peer connection is 5004 in Tieline codecs To contact a codec that is behind a firewall or NAT enabled router it is essential that this and all other relevant ports are open and forwarded to the other device See Multiple Peer to Peer SIP Connections for more details about the default UDP audio ports used in multiple audio stream programs 7 Click the drop down arrows on the right hand side of each active drop down menu to adjust the Encoding Sample rate or Bit rate parameters Click Next to continue ba a ia e A e Click to configure e Auto Jitter Adapt and the preferred auto jitter setting using the drop down arrow for Buffer Priority or e Fixed
150. e alarm Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 162 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Deactivating Input Silence Alarms An Input Silence alarm is activated when the configured audio and duration thresholds have been breached To recover from this alarm state the codec must detect input audio higher than the failure threshold When audio at this level is detected the codec monitors input audio to ensure it doesn t drop below the recovery threshold setting more than 5 times within the nominated Input Silence duration time The alarm is then deactivated automatically Alarm History Click the Alarm History tab within the Alarms Panel to display a record of all system alarms which have been raised Aam P R gt Current Alarms or T l Configure alarms Purge alarm history D Majo 11 09714 5 48 AES Reference Lost AES Clock Sync 1 L Major 1109 44 5 45 25AM_ 141 09 44 7 07 31AM_ Audio AES InputLost AES Inputs 1 2 i iad nt Click the Purge Alarm History button to clear all alarms from the Alarm History tab 20 23 RS232 Data Configuration The codec supports both in band and out of band data depending on the connection transport and algorithm you are using RPTP data is automatically enabled when using the Tieline Music or MusicPLUS algorithms over any transport Over IP it is also possible to enable synchronized out of band data using any algorithm Algorithm Selected ss IP _ ISDNandPoTs Tieline
151. e an ADSL DSL filter to all remote locations ADSL DSL modems can generate noise on a line which will degrade the performance of your codec Simply place the ADSL DSL filter between the POTS line and your codec to remove the interference 3 Tieline USA has a POTS test codec you can dial on 1 317 913 6911 to facilitate line tests at each end of your connection to diagnose line problems 4 Tieline recommends that you confirm your broadcast POTS line works well before you try to go live 22 10 Merlin Compliances and Certifications Declaration of Conformity This Merlin codec meets the requirements of directives for CE and C Tick certifications Technical documentation required by the conformity assessment procedure is kept at the head office of Tieline Technology 1 25 Irvine Drive Malaga Western Australia 6090 EN 55 022 Statement This is to certify that Tieline Merlin is shielded against the generation of radio interference in accordance with the application of EN 55 022 2006 Class A Technical documentation required by the conformity assessment procedure is kept at the head office of Tieline Technology 1 25 Irvine Drive Malaga Western Australia 6090 Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus Tieline Merlin does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications
152. e channels you want to gang and press the button Navigate to the Gang function and press the button to toggle between Enabled or Disabled 6 Use the up and down Ww arrow buttons to highlight and select the audio channels 0O A O N gt Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 26 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 7 Use the left and right gt arrow buttons to adjust the levels for both inputs up or down simultaneously 8 Press the RETURN or HOME buttons to exit the screen ci Important Note 7 e To gang channels quickly press and press and release the right gt arrow button to open the Input Audio Level adjustment screen and follow the preceding instructions Intelligent Gain Control IGC When the broadcast action really starts to heat up the codec s inbuilt DSP limiter automatically takes care of any instantaneous audio peaks that occur in demanding broadcast situations Input IGC Intelligent Gain Control is enabled by default and is automatically activated at 20 dBu G5 audio scale and 14dBu G3 audio scale to prevent audio clipping There are three settings Auto Fixed and Off If Auto is configured the codec will detect when incoming audio levels have reduced sufficiently and automatically return input levels to the gain setting prior to IGC being activated The codec takes just 250 milliseconds to detect audio levels have returned to normal after IGC Level has been initiated and will return the levels to the previous setting
153. e down W navigation button to select a VLAN interface Select Usage and press the button Select the mode of operation for this VLAN e g Control amp Streaming Streaming only Control Only and press the button Use the down W navigation button to scroll to Interface Press the button to select ETH1 or ETH2 then press the button ok Wh N O Selecting an Algorithm The codec offers uncompressed linear audio as well as aptX Enhanced LC AAC HE AAC v 1 and HE AAC v 2 AAC LD AAC ELD AAC ELDv2 MPEG Layer 2 G 711 and G 722 Tieline Music and MusicPLUS algorithms There is a range of pre programmed connection profiles to simplify codec configuration See Choosing Dialing Profiles for more details Overview of Tieline Algorithms 1 The Tieline Music algorithm is optimized for audio bit rates as low as 19 2kbps with only a 20 millisecond encode delay It offers 15 kHz mono from 24kbps to 48kbps 2 Tieline MusicPLUS delivers up to 20 kHz mono from 48kbps upwards It can also deliver up to 20 kHz stereo from 96kbps upwards offering huge savings on your IP data bills and outstanding audio quality Overview of AAC Algorithms AAC LC LC AAC is optimized for audio bit rates of 64kbps per channel or higher using a sample rate of 48kHz Tieline recommends using LC AAC instead of HE AAC if bandwidth of 64kbps or higher per channel is available to optimise audio quality If lower bandwidth than 64kbps is available consider
154. e eee Dial _ a B Pe Select 9 Setup eee eet Aal Sample rate Sessionless e gt Enter Number B Enter Number ee Destination gt Enter Number 4 Reconnect Disabled Save as Program Confio Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 20 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 POTS Menu Navigation Select Connect gt POTS to configure POTS dialing settings using the codec front panel Note default settings are surrounded by square brackets gt Any gt Module 2 Tieline Codecs Sessionless Session Data Dial Route p Routes 1 6 Auto Reconnect _ Disabled _ Module Configuration Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Settings Menu Press the SETTINGS button on the codec front panel to access a wide range of configuration settings Settings LAN ETH 1 amp 2 Tie Lic Time Reset Web Server enses GUI Tieline Audio System config config Headphone Control and RPT a USA ane Usage Streaming Session Paar User Acc Port ounts Off Unit details Modules SIP QoS SNMP Session ETH1 2 IP Address J r pao w mn D a ys D 3 w w Volume be 5 SHO S E tea Control Only Lang P s uage English ea _ Control Only _ Streaming Only gt __Nothing Alt Restor Monitor Source Session e Pass Sett Port Of
155. e extension Similarly in order to receive an IP call from a remote codec over the public internet the same network address translation principle applies NAT and port forwarding allows a single device such as a broadband router to act as an agent between the public internet and a local private LAN The relationship between public and private IP addresses and NAT is displayed in the following diagram and the following section explains port forwarding configuration in more detail Port Forwarding Tieline TCP and UDP Port Settings For your Tieline Codec to communicate over the public internet an IP Address alone is not sufficient In TCP IP and UDP networks the codec port is the endpoint of your connection Ports are doorways for IP devices to communicate with each other Picture a house and imagine the front door is the entry point represented by a public or private IP address Then you want to get to several codecs in different rooms of the same house and ports represent the doors to each of those rooms In principle this is how port addressing works For example several codecs may dial into your studio using the same public static IP address In this situation it is necessary to configure codec programs with audio streams using different audio ports for discretely routing each incoming and outgoing audio stream By doing this your studio s network routers know where IP packets for each audio stream should be routed i e to which codec an
156. e that the current menu has options below and or above the visible items Use the navigation arrows to scroll up and down IF ConfiafPt to Pti JitBut Fined 100 ms Loc Off Rem Off 670o Toi a Ol A E a AEA 1 Up Arow Arrow indicating menus can scroll upwards 2 Down Arrow Arrow indicating menus can scroll downwards Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 16 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Codec Menu Overview Following is an overview of the codec menus from the Home screen Note file playback may not be Supported in all codecs toe Programs Cornet Connect _ BEES Bi CL rr ek e fm Sees 3 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Connect Menu PEET O O EE asec ara eee PE E SoN OTS aan Y ees as az Tiating a a E rae e taui r maT Multicast Client Client l wl Enter IF si Save Pam address LEE Emler PMulticas 2 Reese Bave Pom Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 te Merlin User Manual v 1 4 IP Setup Menu Navigation After selecting IP and a connection mode use Setup to adjust connection settings Setup gt L Music Mono T Music Stereo _ MusicPLUS _ Algorithm i Mono _ MusicPLUS Stereo gt Favorite gt Mono l G 711 G 722 MP2 Mono Sample MP2 Stereo gt SanP gt MP2 J Stereo PCM Mono Sample
157. e to a digital PABX or PBX system permanent damage may result from the high voltage pulses these systems generate Even if the PBX is not digital the performance of the codec is unlikely to be as good as a normal POTS line If you have no option other than to use a PBX or PABX System search for a fax machine The overwhelming majority of fax machines are designed for analog POTS line operation and are normally on an extension optimized for fax machines and data transmission Substitute a normal phone for the fax machine to verify correct operation Use a normal phone not a venue supplied phone because this may have characteristics to match the existing PBX PABX and not a POTS line After confirming correct phone operation you can unplug the phone and attach the phone line to the codec Check the Length of the Line It is desirable to have a local loop which is as short as possible i e the line from your location to the local Central Office or Local Exchange Optimum performance can be expected for lines up to about 2 miles 3 kilometers in length Line quality will be reduced over longer distances and the codec can be expected to perform at lower bit rates Line quality will also be affected by the age condition and type of cabling used e g plastic insulation or paper insulation water or moisture entering the cable age and state of repair of joins POTS Party Lines or Stubs In some countries it was the practice to have more than one
158. e viewed wa HOME gt Cxns and use the down W and up navigation buttons to scroll through Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ter connection statistics The first four stages are observed in auto jitter buffer mode 1 Stabilization period a1 A few seconds at the start of a connection where no action is taken at all while the establishment of a stable connection means analysis of jitter data is not valid 2 Stage 2 a2 A compatibility check to ensure the RIP connection is compliant and RTP clocks are synchronized enough to perform jitter analysis 3 Stage 3 a3 If the compatibility check is successful this is the analysis hold off period During a minute the jitter buffer is held at a safe fixed value of 500ms while enough history is recorded to start jitter buffer adaptation 4 Stage 4 live A This is where the codec determines it is safe enough to start broadcasting using the auto jitter buffer level We recommend running the codec for a few more minutes to obtain a more comprehensive history of the connection s characteristics 5 Fixed F This state is displayed if the jitter buffer is fixed Auto Jitter Buffer and Forward Error Correction FEC lf forward error correction is programmed then additional data packets are sent over a connection to replace any data packets lost There is no need to modify jitter buffer settings if you are sending FEC data only if you are receiving FEC da
159. ecoder Independent Yes 5 Press the right arrow on the Enter button and navigate to Interface Push the down arrow on the Enter button to select this menu 6 Use the Enter button and navigate to the type of interface you are using Note During Tieline tests we used an Internal TA 7 Select the actual terminal adapter connected to your codec Note During Tieline tests we used the internal TA301 8 Use the Enter button and select the switch type for the country you are in Check with your Telco for the correct setting if you are unsure Note During Tieline tests we used the internal NI1 setting for the USA 9 Use the Enter button and keypad to enter the SPID 1 and SPID 2 numbers if required 10 Use the Enter button and keypad to enter the ID 1 and ID 2 Directory MSN numbers if required 11 The codec should now be configured Configuring the Tieline Codec to Connect to the CDQ Prima RON 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN 2 Navigate to Setup and press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 206 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ISOM Dial Setuo Connect setup Tielin Codecs husie hono 32k 6 kbps Dest 1 Press OK to edit 3 Select Session Type Sessionless gt Select Dial Route None gt Number of B Channels Choose 1B mono or 2B stereo gt Algorithm Choose MP2 Mono or MP2 J Stereo Note select 48kHz sample rate for MP2 algori
160. ect an algorithm then press the button Alaorithm 8 Select Tieline Codecs session data when connecting to another Tieline codec or Sessionless when dialing to non Tieline POTS codecs POTS Connect Setup i hodulez Ready Algorithm hiusic hono Session Tieline Codecs ca Ro v A Important Notes To dial a Comrex Vector Matrix or BlueBox codec over POTS select the Other algorithm and Sessionless Please note that 9 6kbps connections are not supported by Comrex codecs 9 Select the Dial Route to use for this audio stream if one is required then press the button Note See Configuring POTS Answering for more information on Dial Route and Answer Route tags These can be useful when routing multiple audio streams Select Dial Route Oo Route 2 Route 3 10 Navigate to Auto Reconnect and press the button to Enable or Disable this setting as required POTS Connect Setuo i hodule Ready todule Configuration 11 Select Module Configuration to adjust other settings specific to how you want POTS modules to dial and answer e g Maximum connection bit rate and dial tone settings etc POTS Connect Setuo Auto Reconr pisabled tdoduyle Configuration Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 eo Merlin User Manual v 1 4 12 When configuration is complete press the RETURN button to navigate back to the Connect POTS screen ci Important Note At this point you can navigate to Save on the Connect POTS screen Ee
161. ed trademark of Audemat group in the United States and or other countries 9 Mayah is a registered trademark of MAYAH Communications GmbH in the United States and or other countries 10 Telos Zephyr and Xstream are registered trademarks of Telos Systems in the United States and or other countries 11 Other product names mentioned within this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks or a trade name of their respective owner 12 MPEG Layer 3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson Licensing NOOA 0 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 232 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 23 Merlin Specifications Input Output Specifications Analog Audio Inputs 2 x Female XLR line inputs Analog Audio Outputs 2 x Male XLR AES3 In 1 x female XLR Channel 1 in shared with Ch1 analog input AES3 Out 1 x male XLR Auxiliary Input 1 x 6 35mm 1 4 Mic Line level Jack on rear panel Headphones Out Aux 1 x 6 35mm 1 4 Jack on rear panel and 1 x 6 35mm 1 4 Jack on the Out front panel Control Port In Out Four relay inputs and four opto isolated outputs for machine control via a DB15 connector Audio Input High Impedance gt 5K ohm Impedance Output Impedance lt 50 ohm Balanced Clipping Level 22dBu input and outputs A D amp D A Converters 24 bit Frequency Response 20Hz to 22kHz at 48kHz THD and Noise lt 0 0035 at 16dBu or 89dBu unweighted Analog THD
162. efault reference level is selected the first codec you connect with will configure the reference level used for all subsequent multi unicast connections Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 28 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 9 Configuring AES3 Audio The codec has an IN1 AES3 input on the rear panel of the codec for AES3 AES EBU format audio This balanced 110 ohm female XLR input can operate effectively over distances of up to 100 meters and accepts both mono and stereo AES3 signals 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Navigate to Audio and press or 3 Select Input Type and press the button 4 Navigate to the inputs you want to configure and press the button to toggle between Analog and AES3 The 3 pin male XLR AES3 OUT connector is capable of sending both mono and stereo AES3 signals Important Notes Input levels are set at 100 automatically for AES3 connections If you switch back to the analog input setting after selecting AES3 the previous analog settings will be recovered W AES3 Sample Rate Conversion The codec contains two sample rate converters Input Sample Rate Converter The codec implements an Asynchronous Sample Rate Converter ASRC to convert the sample rate of an AES input to the sample rate set in the codec The codec sample rate is determined by the selected algorithm For example if you select the Music algorithm the sample rate will be set to 32kHz By default the codec will up sample all channel 1 and 2 A
163. efore attempting a new audio stream connection please connect and adjust the following 1 Attach power to the codec 2 For IP connections attach RJ45 Ethernet cables to at least one of the ETH ports on the codec s rear panel Attach cables to ISDN or POTS modules inserted in your codec as required 3 Attach headphones to the 6 35mm 1 4 headphone jack on the codec s front panel 4 Check that the correct country is selected in the codec i Press the SETTINGS button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 oso Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ii Navigate to System and press the button iii Navigate to Country and press the button iv Use the navigation buttons to select your country of operation and press the button 5 Make sure you know the IP address or line numbers for dialing over ISDN or POTS to the destination codec ci Important Note It is important to set the correct country setting for connections over POTS to adjust the POTS G5 module for varying line voltages in different countries The country setting also affects whether G 711 wu Law North America Japan or A Law Europe Australasia coding is used over IP SIP and ISDN connections 18 1 Steps to Connect over IP The following procedure will create a custom peer to peer connection program using the codec front panel keypad and navigation buttons It instructs how to connect your codec over IP for the very first time without using the Toolbox web GUI and your computer for co
164. el lock and each requires a user to enter a PIN to access different features Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 1 Admin PIN Required to change codec connection or configuration settings accessed via the SETTINGS button Default PIN is 456789 2 User PIN Required to use the codec front panel buttons and dial nangup a connection Default PIN is 123456 Enabling the Front Panel Lock Feature 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Navigate to System and press or 3 Navigate to Auto Lock and press to toggle from Disabled to Enabled Sistem Conta Auto Lock Lock Thout Admin Pin 4 Navigate down to the panel Lock Timeout field and press to enter the desired time out period in seconds Note The time out period is the time in seconds before the codec front panel is relocked after being used 5 If you want to change the default Admin PIN or User PIN navigate down to each in turn and press to enter a new PIN Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 19 19 1 Connecting to the ToolBox Web GUI Codecs can be configured using the ToolBox web GUI and this can be launched using an IP LAN connection with the codec Instructions for using the web GUI are contained in the application itself from the Help panel and additional information is available at http www tieline com support toolbox The Tieline web GUI application runs on e Internet Explorer 6 or greater on Windows XP Windows V
165. elect LAN and press the button 3 Use the down W navigation button to select ETH1 ETH2 or a VLAN interface 4 Select Usage and choose the appropriate control and or streaming mode for the connection then press the button 5 Select IPv4 Mode and press the button 6 Select Static and press the button 7 Navigate to IPv4 Static and enter the IP address then press the button 8 Navigate to IPv4 Subnet and enter the Subnet Mask then press the button 9 Navigate to IPv4 Gateway and enter the Gateway details then press the button ETH1 Config fPrmarei Pu Staticl A Pu Subre e55 255 2550 Put Datewt 40 1 1254 p 10 Use the up navigation button to scroll to the top of the menu and select Apply Setting then press the button to confirm the new settings 11 Check the Unit Details menu to ensure the new static IP address has been entered correctly IPv6 Address Assignment There are three IPv6 settings available for each Ethernet port on the codec and any VLANs which are configured 1 Auto An address is automatically assigned to the codec when you connect the codec to an IPv6 router This process is similar to how an IPv4 DHCP address is assigned 2 Manual Select to manually enter IPv6 address details 3 Off Select to ignore IPv6 address details Important Note Select Off if you are not using IPv6 to connect to another device This ensures your codec will attempt to connect using IPv4 at all ti
166. elect the Send Return audio balance and use the left 4 or right gt navigation buttons to adjust the balance The Send Return audio balance dictates whether the front panel HEADPHONE output and the rear panel HP AUX output monitors send input encoder audio only return audio only decoder audio from a connected device or a mix of both send and return audio 4 Press RETURN when you have finished Note Headphone levels can also be adjusted by pressing the SETTINGS button navigate to Audio and then HP Vol Bal and press or Adjusting the Monitor Source In headphone listen mode it is possible to select monitoring sources va HEADPHONE gt Monitor Source gt Select audio Source Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 31 Headohone Headphone ARERR Volume 615 Send 100 i Return 0 Honitor Source Default Navigate to the source you want to monitor and press or Options include 1 Default the default factory program headphone mix 2 Audio Stream monitors the selected codec audio stream 3 Inputs monitors the codec inputs i e encoders The default headphone mixes for factory programs are displayed in the following table 1 x Peer to Peer Mono Inputs 1 amp 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 1 x Peer to Peer Stereo Inout1 Output 1 Inout 2 Output 2 2 x Mono Peer to Peer Inout 1 Output 1 Inout 2 Output 2 1 x Mono Peer to Peer IFB Inputs 1 amp 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 Aux In Aux O
167. eline session data port used by your codec 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen 2 Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select Settings and press the button 3 Select Tieline Session and press or 4 Navigate to Session Port or Alternative Session Port and press or 5 Adjust the setting and press the button to store the new configuration Audio Port Settings for Tieline Session Data and Sessionless IP Calls The codec supports sessionless IP streaming whereby the codec does not send Tieline session data when attempting to connect When using this mode you need to configure the send audio port codec port at the remote end of the link to which you are sending audio and return audio port port used by the local codec to receive audio from the remote codec It is also possible to configure the send and return audio ports for a codec using Tieline session data to establish IP connections This may be required because some firewalls require symmetric port configuration Sessionless Audio Port Configuration When you select Sessionless as the Session Protocol e The default value for both the Send and Return audio Ports is 9000 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 187 e The range of values for the audio ports is 2000 to 65535 e The audio port values can be set independently e Both audio ports can always be configured i e there is no dependency on encode decode direction T
168. enter a new password and press the button to save the new setting Note there is no character limit for passwords lf you forget the password for the Toolbox web GUI then you can always press the SETTINGS button on the codec and navigate to WebGUI to view the current password and change it if required Important Note The Username in the menu is permanently set to Tieline and cannot be changed only the Password can be changed Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 so Merlin User Manual v 1 4 20 Using the Web GUI The following sections provide an overview of the different programming panels available within the codec s Toolbox web GUI Navigate with the mouse pointer to a symbol at the top of the web GUI screen and click to open the panel selected When a panel is opened in the web GUI the text below the symbol at the top of the screen is highlighted see Master in the following image tatistics Rules Settings Web GUI Symbols for Opening Panels The most recently opened panel is displayed underneath the Master panel by default Click the Maximize Minimize s symbol to view a panel in full screen mode or click to minimize back to the default panel size Master Panel to Load and Connect Programs Audio Streams and Connections mt ProgramiCmn 203 36 205 163 LOQ Snd 89 Rin 99 TxMusic Stereo Rx Music Stereo Feature _ __ Feature Description o o 1 Input Output PPMs 6 PPM meters to
169. erlin User Manual v 1 4 distributing IP audio economically and efficiently across broadcast networks See the procedures for configuring different programs using the web GUI for more configuration details On Demand Failover IP ISDN or POTS On demand failover requires configuration of a primary connection and an on demand cold backup connection On demand failover is activated when the dialing codec program detects the loss of the primary connection or if audio streaming ceases The backup connection is then dialed to replace the primary connection The codec can be configured to switch to a backup connection over IP ISDN or POTS as required For example you can create a program with IP as the primary connection and also create a backup ISDN or POTS connection in the same program For details on configuring backup connections using failover see Configuring Merlin Point to Point Programs Primary IP connection Backup IP connection Primary IP connection Backup IP connection Studio Codec Remote Codec t t i 10 IO IZ t 1S gt dD E 2 Ea gt 1 E n t D G 1 ah ez toO O0 E a o a S Bo J 3 i 4 POTS connection POTS connection Forward Error Correction FEC FEC transmits a secondary stream of audio data packets over a single connection If packets are lost or corrupted over the connection then replacement FEC data packets can
170. ernet ports i mitigates lost packets on either link and will provide IP network backup if an IP link is lost To learn more about SmartStream PLUS redundant IP streaming see http www tieline com Transports SmartStream IP ispn For ISDN connections enter a number and select which B channel to use Select the Enable bonded connections check box to configure and bond multiple B channels Module 1 B Any Module 1 B Any a Next click Save Program to save the program with default algorithm settings or click Next to specify a different algorithm and configure a backup connection if required recommended Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 12 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Dialing settings for this ISDN audio stream are now complete Select POTS Codec in the Mode drop down menu to encode decode using POTS or select Analog Phone to configure a standard analog phone call then click Next i PoTscode O O Meinecodsees lt E oe Fy Next enter the phone number of the codec or device you want to dial When multiple POTS modules are installed click the Via drop down menu and select Module 1 or Module 2 to specify which POTS module will dial Next click Save Program to save the program with default settings or click Next to specify algorithm settings and configure a backup connection if required recommended oy pra N a id a A 7
171. ess i Speed dial 0 assigned to Studia 1 Speed Dialing 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen 2 Use the numeric KEYPAD to enter the speed dial number 3 When the Speed Dial screen appears press the button or the CONNECT button to connect 18 12 Dial Disconnect Multiple Audio Stream Programs Multiple Audio Streams within Programs Some programs are created to allow simultaneous audio stream connections with different destination codecs e g 2 x Mono peer to peer programs These programs can only be created using the Toolbox web GuUI There are two ways to simultaneously dial multiple audio stream connections within these types of programs 1 Load the program into the codec wa the front panel and dial 2 Connect to the codec using the Toolbox web GUI and use the Master panel to load the program and connect Dialing Multiple Audio Stream Programs with the Front Panel 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen 2 Use the navigation buttons to select Programs and press the button 3 Use the up and down Ww navigation buttons to select the program you want to connect with then press the CONNECT button to make a connection 4 The Wait Connecting screen appears briefly and then the Home screen is displayed It is also possible to redial the connection see Redialing a Connection for more information Disconnect All Audio Stream Connections 1 Press the red DISCONNECT button on the numeric KEYP
172. ext box type Run and press Enter iii Type CMD in the Run dialog text box and click OK iv Type ping and the IP address of the codec you are pinging i e ping 192 168 0 159 and press the Enter key on your keyboard v The round trip time of the packets is displayed as well as any packet loss fs Administrator C Windows system32 cmd exe Co NUsers Glenn ping 172 16 184 255 Pinging 172 16 184 235 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 172 16 184 235 hbytes 32 timetims TTL 64 Reply from 172 16 164 235 bytes 32 time 208ms TTL 64 Reply from 172 16 184 235 hbytes 32 time 467ms TTL 64 Reply from 172 16 184 2355 bytes 32 time 6ms TTL 64 Ping statistics for 172 16 184 235 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost B x loss gt Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Mininum fms Maximum 48 7 ms Average 155ms Cc Users Glenn gt 2 Long test sends packets continuously until stopped i Point to the start menu on your PC and click once ii In the search text box type Run and press Enter iii Type CMD in the Run dialog text box and click OK iv Type ping the IP address of the codec you are pinging and then t i e ping 203 36 205 163 t and press the Enter key on your keyboard v Let the test run for several minutes and then press CTRL C vi The round trip time of the packets is displayed as well as any packet loss for the period of time that the test occurred Trace the Route of IP Packets Another uti
173. eyed out intentionally depending on features available e t is possible to save a program at several points throughout the program wizard and use default settings to save configuration time e To learn more about programs see the section titled About Program Dialing e Always dial the multicast server codec connection first before connecting multicast client codecs e Multicast client codecs will display return link quality LQ only The Return reading represents the audio being downloaded from the network locally Multicast server codecs do not display LQ readings e The default UDP audio port setting is 9000 for the first multicast 9010 for the second multicast and 9020 for the third multicast The client and server port settings must match to receive an audio stream E g if a client codec wishes to receive multicast audio stream 2 then it must use audio port 9010 e Forward Error Correction FEC is not available for multicast connections e Use firmware higher than 2 8 xx in the Bridge IT Genie and Merlin families of codecs to enable auxiliary data e It is not possible to connect to a G3 codec and receive multicast IP audio streams e To copy multicast client programs onto multiple codecs see Save_and Restore Configuration Files e f the codec is answering more than one mono or stereo multicast connection it is necessary to create an answering program to suit the answering configuration and lock this program in the codec Configu
174. f the codec you want to dial using the or buttons to enter the periods in the IP address Next press the down w navigation button to select Setup and press or ConnectiP fPt to Pti 205 56 205 167 ci Important Note The codec remembers recent IP addresses just like a cell phone To vew these addresses just press L when you select the Connect IP screen The most recent addresses and programs are listed first and you can use the navigation buttons to Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 51 scroll up and down Press 4 to select the address you have highlighted Recent Call 205 356 205 155 172 16 119 206 4 Navigate to Algorithm and press or IP Conta fPt to Pti Alg Music Stereo 32k 64kbps JitBut Fined 100 ms a Loc Off Rem Off 5 Use the navigation buttons to select an algorithm profile or manually enter algorithm settings then press or Set Algonthm If you decide to manually program the algorithm use the navigation buttons to select your preferred algorithm sample rate if displayed and bit rate pressing after each option is selected 6 Press the down w navigation button to select Jitter Buffer and press to select a different automatic jitter buffer setting for your connection or to enter a fixed buffer setting in milliseconds maximum 5000 ms The default Auto Best Compromise setting is a good starting point for most internet connections IF Confia fPt to
175. fixed output sample rates Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 30 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 10 Merlin Headphone Aux Output The codec has a 6 35mm 1 4 RTS stereo HEADPHONE output for monitoring inputs and return audio If you are using analog inputs or digital inputs you will see audio metering on the PPMs and can monitor it with the headphones ci Important Note The front panel HEADPHONE output and rear panel HP AUX output share the same hardware output This means both are switched and configured together l e both outputs are either a stereo headphone output default setting or a balanced mono auxiliary output Configure for Headphone and Aux Output Both the front panel HEADPHONE and rear panel HP AUX outputs are configured as stereo headphone outputs by default To adjust this setting 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Navigate to Audio and press or 3 Select HP Aux Out and press to toggle between Headphone and Aux Out Audio Conta HPiAuH Out Beets AUH Bal Line Send 30 Return 100 Input Type 142 4nalo9 Adjust Headphone Output Settings 1 Press the HEADPHONE button to display the headphone monitoring adjustment screen 2 Use the left or right gt navigation buttons to adjust the volume level up or down The screen displays level adjustments in real time Headohone fi Headphone FRR volume 615 Send 100 i Return 034 tdonitor Source Default 3 Press the down w navigation button to s
176. g represents the audio being downloaded from the network locally Forward Error Correction FEC is not available for multicast connections It is not possible to send auxiliary data using multicast connections It is not possible to connect to a G3 codec and receive multicast IP audio streams To copy multicast client programs onto multiple codecs see Save_and Restore Configuration Files To learn more about programs see the section titled About Program Dialing See Toolbox web GUI documentation for more detailed information about Configuring Multicast Client Programs 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen select Connect gt IP gt Sessionless and press the button 2 Select Multicast Client to configure a client codec program IF Mode T a Peer hulhcast Server Multicast Client 3 Use the RETURN button to delete any numbers already entered then use the numeric KEYPAD to enter the multicast IP address you want to dial using the or buttons to enter the periods in the IP address The same multicast address and audio port must be used for both the server and client programs Next press the down w navigation button to select Setup and press ox Connecti fhicast Ci 220 255 255 em fm l 4 Press the down w navigation button to select Algorithm and press or Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 IF Connect Seto fticast C1 Alg iMusic hono 32k 28 8kbps JitEuf Auto Best C
177. gion e g a SPID is normally required in the US 10 Navigate up to Apply Settings and press the button Dialing from the Tieline Codec Program Dialing 1 If you have saved the ISDN program as previously instructed press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt Programs Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 207 2 Select the saved program you want to load and press the button 3 Select Load and press the button to load the program 4 Press the CONNECT button to dial the ISDN program connections Ad Hoc Dialing 1 If you haven t save the program but have entered the dialing numbers and other settings press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN gt Connect 2 Press the button to dial using the settings previously entered After dialing successfully FRAMED should illuminate on the CDQ Prima screen Tieline codecs also support 32kKHz sampling Important Note Configure ISDN Answer Config settings in the codec before attempting to dial from the Equinox to the Tieline codec Select the following settings in the Tieline codec in one of the Configs see ISDN Answering Configuration for more detail e May bond e Sessionless e Algorithm MP2 Mono MP2 J Stereo e Sample Rate 48kHz Making a Mono Call from the CDQ Prima Codec Press the Dial button on the front panel of the codec Navigate right using the Enter button and select
178. hannel quickly afterwards Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 208 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 22 7 3 Connecting to Mayah ISDN Configuring the Mayah Sporty to Make an ISDN Call Plug your ISDN line into the codec and attach power Press F2 Codec Press F3 Setup Press F2 Quality Use the navgation buttons to select an algorithm setting from G 722 L2 Mono Stereo or J Stereo or E apt X Mono or Stereo then press the OK button to save the setting Press F4 ESC to return to the home screen Press F2 Codec then F1 Connect then F3 Direct Navigate to interface and press OK to select ISDN Navigate to numberi and press OK to enter the ISDN number using the keypad then press OK 10 If you are bonding multiple channels navigate to number2 and press OK to enter the ISDN number using the keypad then press OK ok WD O CO N OD Configuring the Tieline Codec to Dial the Mayah Sporty over ISDN 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN 2 Navigate to Setup and press the button ISOM Dial Setup Connect Setup Tieline Codecs Music Mono 32k 64kbps Dest 1 Press OK to edit 3 Select Session Type Sessionless gt Select Dial Route None gt Number of B Channels Choose the number of B channels between 1 and 4 required for your connection gt Algorithm Choose G 722 E apt X Mono or Stereo MP2 Mono or Stereo or MP2 J Stereo No
179. hannel then that s all you need to do If however you want each non Tieline codec to use the same B channel and be routed to the same codec output consistently you must configure this in the site config for the ISDN module via Settings gt Answering gt ISDN Answer Configs or via the web GUI using the Settings panel gt Modules Step 3 Configuring the module to answer calls from a specific non Tieline codec consistently lf a Directory Number DN or MSN number is not entered in the codec and multiple B channels are available the codec may use any channel to answer an incoming call To ensure calls are routed consistently enter a DN MSN number without the country or area code as the DN MSN for a B channel then only that corresponding B channel will answer an incoming call to that number Enter the number for the first B channel into the field for Directory Number MSN1 This has been allocated Route 1 previously Enter the number for the second B channel into the field for Directory Number MSN2 This has been allocated Route 2 previously Next click Save Settings Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 29 l Network Options Audio SIP ISDN Answer POT i Module a Save setings ie If codec 1 always uses the first directory number to call then it will always be routed via Route 1 to the Answering Audio Stream Connection using Answer Route 1 configured in step 1 Codec 2
180. he Input Audio Level adjustment screen e Press the number on the keypad corresponding to the channel you want to toggle on or off E g press O on the numeric keypad to toggle channel 1 on and off e Use the up and down Ww navigation buttons to select the gang function and press the button to toggle ganging on off e Use the up and down Ww navigation buttons to select a single channel or ganged channels Note A channel is highlighted when selected e Use the left and right gt navigation buttons to adjust the input levels up or down 2 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen select Connect gt ISDN and press the button 3 Navigate to Setup and press the button ISOM Dial Setup Connect setup Tieline Codecs husie hono 32k 6 kbps Dest 1 Press OK to edit 4 Select whether to dial with Tieline Session Data or select Sessionless if dialing a non Tieline codec then press the button Session Toe Tieline Codecs Sesslonless Important Note By default when Tieline codecs dial they send call configuration settings to the remote codec using Tieline Session Data This configures the codec receiving the call with matching algorithm sample rate and bit rate settings This does not occur when dialing to non Tieline devices therefore Sessionless must be selected to provide compatibility 5 Select the Dial Route to use for this audio stream if one is required then press the button Note Se
181. he front panel to select LAN and press the button Use the down W navigation button to select a VLAN interface Select Usage and press the button Select the mode of operation for this VLAN e g Control amp Streaming Streaming only Control Only and press the button Use the down W navigation button to scroll to VLAN ID Press the button to enter a number between 1 4094 inclusive Press the button to confirm this setting VLAN Priority VLAN configuration only The VLAN Priority setting represents a prioritization scheme for forwarding data packets throughout Virtual Local Area Networks ok Wh N O Press the SETTINGS button Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select LAN and press the button Use the down W navigation button to select a VLAN interface Select Usage and press the button Select the mode of operation for this VLAN e g Control amp Streaming Streaming only Control Only and press the button Use the down W navigation button to scroll to VLAN Priority Press the button to enter a number from 0 to 7 inclusive Press the button to confirm this setting Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 21 2 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 171 VLAN Interface VLAN configuration only This setting applies the VLAN settings to a physical Ethernet port in the codec Press the SETTINGS button Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select LAN and press the button Use th
182. he studio codec is configured you are now ready to receive an incoming call from the remote codec over the internet Always dial from the field codec to the studio codec over the internet unless the remote codec is assigned a public static IP address and you know this address If you dial the studio using a cell phone data network at the remote site you will not normally experience any firewall or port blocking issues at the remote end of the link using default Tieline ports Troubleshooting How to Determine Where Firewall Port Blocking is Occurring If you find you are unable to either send or receive audio between the studio and remote codecs you can use Tieline s Link Quality reading to diagnose where ports are being blocked LQ can be displayed on the front LCD screen of Tieline s Bridge IT Merlin and Genie codecs by selecting Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 195 Cxns then select the connection you want to view and press the OK button LQ readings are also displayed on the home screen of all Commander and i Mix G3 codecs Link Quality LQ Readings Send and Return LQ numbers help you to determine if a problem is occurring at either end of a connection For example on an IP connection the Return LQ reading represents the audio being downloaded from the network locally i e audio data is being sent by the remote codec Conversely the Send LQ reading represents the audio data being sent by the local codec i e
183. ieline Codec Port Configuration If using the Tieline Codec setting for call establishment i e Tieline session data is enabled you can also change the default audio ports if required e The default value for the Send audio Port is 9000 e The range of values for the Send Port is 2000 to 65535 e The default port value for the Return audio Port is Automatic Note Automatic indicates that the codec will allocate the return port value and send this information to the codec to which you are dialing e The range of values for the Return Port is 2000 to 65535 Sessionless Multicast Connections For a sessionless multicast server connection e Only the Send Port is available e The default value for the port is 9000 e The range of values for the port is 2000 to 65535 For a sessionless multicast client connection e Only the Return Port is available e The default value for the port is 9000 e The range of values for the port is 2000 to 65535 21 8 Configuring QoS for IP Packets It is possible for IP networks to prioritize and differentiate between data packets transmitted through routers across networks This is useful because in modern data networks many different IP services like email voice web pages video and streaming music coexist within the same network infrastructure Prioritizing IP Data Packets when Broadcasting IP audio data packets can be programmed for expedited or assured forwarding Quality of Service or QoS when t
184. ig 41 G3 interoperability 40 GUl configuration 99 GUI module config 99 GUI module settings 99 how to configure 40 module settings 41 monitoring connections 60 network types 41 non Tieline codecs 44 precautions 219 Power inputs 11 Preparing to connect 49 Profiles 71 Programs 2 x Mono Peer to Peer 49 about multicasts 47 about multi unicasts 47 about peer to peer calls 4 7 audio streams 4 7 backup and restore 151 config Mono Stereo IFB Answer 133 config Mono Stereo IFB Dial 121 configure 2 Mono Peer to Peer 117 configure 2 mono audio streams 117 configure peer to peer mono stereo 108 delete 149 deleting 68 dial multiple connections 63 dialing 61 disconnect multiple connections 63 editing 149 how do they work 4 7 lock 74 Mono or stereo IFB 49 session data 47 specify outputs 2 x Mono Peer to Peer 117 unlock 74 view settings 149 Q QoS configuration 154 187 DSCP 154 187 Quality of Service configuration 154 187 DSCP 154 187 Quick start dialing 50 dialing ISDN 55 dialing POTS 58 first steps 50 how to connect 50 how to connect ISDN 55 how to connect POTS 58 R Rear panel connections 11 Redialing 62 Reference 190 Relay closures 184 Relays configuration 184 pinouts 184 Reset factory default settings 150 188 programs 150 188 user settings 150 188 Restore factory default settings viaweb GUI 150 Restore factory defaults via front panel 188 RS232 baud rates va we
185. igure higher bandwidth mono or stereo connections using algorithms such as MusicPLUS and MPEG The codec has two module slots available Each module supports 2 B channels and it is possible to insert two ISDN modules and bond 4 B channels together This will increase connection bandwidth to 256 kbps for connections using high quality algorithms like aptX Enhanced Important Considerations There are a number of things to consider if you are using your codec in ISDN mode Some of these things include e Will you be operating within North America or other countries Will you be using a single B channel 2 B channels or 4 B channels Which network will you be using Is your ISDN line Point to Point or Point to Multipoint What are your directory numbers DN lf you are in the US what are your Service Profile ID SPID numbers What is your Multiple Subscriber Number MSN if you need to enter this outside North America The answers to these questions will be influenced by the country in which you operate For example a SPID does not need to be entered into a Tieline codec for operation within Europe but it does in North America U and S T ISDN Interfaces In North America the telephone company provides its BRI customers with a U interface The U interface is a two wire single pair interface from the phone switch It supports full duplex data transfer over a single pair of wires therefore only a single device can be connected to a
186. igure the codec to Dial only Then click Next Program Summary It is also possible to select an Dial Route if required When routing multiple audio streams over transports like ISDN or POTS you can use Dial and Answer Routes to configure deterministic of routing audio streams Use of Dial and Answer Routes is not recommended over IP See Configuring ISDN Answering or Configuring POTS Answering for more information Use the default settings for IP connections 4 This audio stream connection in the wizard will allow the codec to dial Enter the connection name in the text box then click Next Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 123 Program Summary 5 Follow the instructions on the right hand side of the panel to configure the transport settings for the connection then click Next Program Summary Important Note Bidirectional auxiliary IP data is available on one audio stream When auxiliary data is enabled on one stream the option is greyed out for the other audio stream in the program wizard See RS232 Data Configuration for detailed information on RS232 data and see Enabling Relays and RS232 Data for more information on relay operations 6 Configure destination codec dialing and encoding settings For IP connections configure the IP address ports and then specify which streaming interface is used to dial this connection e g Primary port ETH1 or Secondary port ETH2 Note By defau
187. ils about individual settings within the program wizard Internet Bidirectional Mono remote 2 Merlin IP Codec at the Studio Bidirectional mono remote audio 2 Routing 2 Incoming Mono Audio Streams to Specific Codec Outputs A more Notes Before you start program configuration please note 7 e You cannot edit a program when it is currently loaded in the codec e You can lock a loaded custom program in a codec to ensure the currently loaded program type cannot be unloaded by a codec dialing in with a different program type e Some drop down menus and settings may be greyed out intentionally depending on features available and the transport selected e g IP or ISDN e t is possible to save a program at several points throughout the program wizard and use default settings to save configuration time e Failover and SmartStream PLUS redundant streaming are not available with SIP or sessionless IP connections e To learn more about programs see the section titled About Program Dialing If your intention is to ensure 2 incoming mono peer to peer audio stream connections are always routed to the same outputs configure a new answering program as follows 1 Open the web GUI and click the Programs the Programs panel 2 Click the New Program button to open the wizard and e Click in the text box to name the new program e Select 2 x Mono Peer to Peer or if you want to use an existing program as a template select this op
188. ing FEC Recommended for local and LAN delay in a ratio of 5 1 connections FEC is off in the codec and the Recommended for wired LAN connection bandwidth is equal to connections amp managed T1 amp E1 the connection bit rate setting in connections for STLs that have the codec connections that arent shared amp have quality of service QoS Important Note FEC can only be programmed for use with the Music and MusicPLUS algorithms How does FEC work If you program a FEC setting of 20 and you are losing one packet in every five sent the lost packet will be replaced by FEC to maintain the quality of the connection If you are losing more packets than this say one in three it will be necessary to increase the FEC setting to 33 to compensate Note There is an inverse relationship between FEC settings and the jitter buffer millisecond setting that you use for IP connections So why not use 100 FEC every time The answer is because you need twice the bit rate to achieve full redundancy and depending on the link conditions this could potentially cause more dropouts because of network congestion than it fixes Here is a simple rule to remember Your maximum uplink speed is all the bandwidth you have to play with As a rule of thumb try not to exceed more than 80 of your maximum bandwidth If your link is shared be even more conservative You should also consider the remote end too What is their maximum uplo
189. ing SNMP Settings The codec supports Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP for managing devices on IP networks To configure SNMP settings 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Use the navigation buttons to select SNMP and press the button 3 Navigate to each setting in turn and press the button to adjust and save each new setting SMF Settnas Rr Communit feline Fe Important Note For more information on SNMP codec settings see Configuring SNMP in the Codec 21 11 TestMode Test mode is used by the codec to perform an input output loopback test of audio E g Input 1 is routed to Output 1 Input 2 is routed to Output 2 etc 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Navigate to Audio and press fox 3 Navigate to Test Mode and press 4 Navigate to Info and press 44 to view the Audio Loopback Test Mode summary Loopback input output test mode is enabled while the Audio Loopback Test Mode dialog appears on the screen When you navigate out of this screen this test mode ceases g Audio Loopback Test Mode HPL inputi inputs inputs Dect Oecs Decs Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 190 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 22 Reference The following sections contain reference and troubleshooting information 22 1 Regular Maintenance Tieline recommends the codec undergoes regular maintenance to ensure operational efficiency and prolong its life WARNINGS All work should be carried out by suitably qualified pers
190. ing is configured in your codec via Settings gt System gt Country 2 If you are dialing between two Tieline codecs you normally only need to configure_an ISDN dialing program via Connect gt ISDN See Configuring ISDN to adjust settings using the Toolbox web GUI Other more advanced settings can also be configured 1 Select Settings gt Modules gt Select ISDN Module to adjust ISDN module settings specific to your codec site See Configure ISDN Module Settings for more information see Configuring ISDN Modules to adjust settings using the Toolbox web GUI 2 ISDN answering can be configured to suit e Hardware available in the codec i e the number of B channels available e Expected dialing behaviors e g if B channels should bond or not and whether audio streams need to use Route tags e The type of call being made e g Tieline with Tieline Session Data versus non Tieline sessionless calls Adjust answering configuration via Settings gt Answering gt ISDN Answer Configs gt Select Config and see ISDN_Answering Configuration for more information See Configuring_ISDN Answering to adjust settings using the Toolbox web GUI 12 1 ISDN Module Settings ISDN settings in the Module menu will determine how each installed module operates at a particular site This allows you to copy programs between codecs installed at different locations and separately configure site specific settings for how each ISDN module shoul
191. io 1 nput Outpu 1 amp 2 a Merlin IP Codec at the Studio Input Output and Audio Port Assignments for Remote Codec Input Output and 1 x Mono Stereo IFB Program at the Studio Audio Port Assignments Bidirectional stereo Bidirectional stereo romot audio 1 nput Outpu UDP Audio UDP Audio nput Output remote audio 1 lt Port 9000 Port 9000 J _ 1 amp 2 UDP Audio UDP Audio Aux Merlin IP Codec IP Codec at Bidirectional Port 9010 Port 9010 Input Output the Studio oe at Remote Site 1 Merlin PLUS at the studio connects to a remote Merlin Note Aux input 3 IFB routing option Merlin PLUS Bidirectional Mono IFB 1 Connecting other Tieline Codecs When a codec which only supports a mono or stereo audio stream attempts to connect e g Commander G3 i Mix G3 or Bridge IT codecs not supporting a separate IFB audio stream the Merlin or Merlin PLUS codec at the studio will accept the call and stream mono or stereo audio only A second IP codec or smartphone running the Report IT application can also be configured to connect and deliver the bidirectional mono IFB audio stream 1 x Mono or Stereo Peer to Peer IFB via Two Remote Devices Merlin IP Codec Bidirectional mono Report IT app for at the Studio or stereo audio bidirectional IFB via i Mix codec jassa simne Important Note Remember to lock the program when connecting a Mono or Stereo Peer to Peer IFB program using
192. ired Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 IP Connection Bit rates Supported eer ido aera da ee ee eee ow cle em aloe ey Y S SC SMTA TOCSY eect cost feet it 96 vo e ree oee se ee fow rafen rm alos mie ovowasnn asz_ zer ot fea arfs wm OCS dC STO ros eee Cig pL ATE zes esp SC CSSCOOCCCCOOO eas o Eas EE v9 m C E S ZHA8 SE pe HE bh OUOW pasueyua KIGE a a a S a e Et pave EA ade vce se eet fot a A E a T E CU CLIL nee ce et tee ee eee is 2 E E poze _fose_ eot oo fex a TTS re fori za Po 9s et ot eer OCOCOCSOSCSOCSC NNNNNNNNS Eas a eS fer fot Peer fe pos pe OOOO ee Ct za eet ot feet er os oo A oz fee ee 9s oo ee OOOO ais rae payoddns sajey Wg UOlpauUUOD UI WN pue alUayH ajyey ajdwes wyywosy ty Ltd 2014 ine P Tieli 178 21 3 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ISDN Encoding Options The codec supports ISDN connections using the following algorithms and B Channel assignments __tSDNEncoding B B 3B E or Mono 16bit 32KHz oo wf v V v Eag Mono 16068 O o E AptX Mono 24bit 32KHz C Music Mono C A Music Plus Mono Ox yyy ae hae ee a v MP2 Mono 32KHz MpzstereoszkHe MF MP2 Mono 48KHz Le fy MP2stereoaskHz wT o MP2 J Stereo 32KHz Pw Manaset MF 6 711 pv oof SSS SS SS Configuring the Jitter Buffer Jitter also known as latency or delay
193. is available VLANs can be used to operate SmartStream PLUS or separate codec Control and Streaming functions if required Following are a range of options which can be configured in the LAN menu After completing configuration ensure you navigate to Apply Setting and press the button to apply the new settings ETH1 Conta Apple Setting Usage Control amp Streaming Configure an IPv4 DHCP Address By default the codec is programmed for DHCP assigned IP addresses DHCP IP addresses are automatically assigned and can change each time you connect to your Internet Service Provider or by a router on your local area network LAN 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Select LAN and press the button 3 Use the down W navigation button to select ETH1 ETH2 or a VLAN interface Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 169 4 Select Usage and choose the appropriate control and or streaming mode for the connection then press the button 5 Select IPv4 Mode and press the button 6 Select DHCP and press the button 7 Use the up navigation button to scroll to the top of the menu and select Apply Setting then press the button to confirm the new settings Configure a Static IPv4 Address Static IP addresses are fixed addresses which are recommended for studio installations Using a static IP address ensures remote codecs can connect reliably using the same IP address over time 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 S
194. ista and Windows 7 e Firefox 3 or greater on Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 Solaris and Linux Web GUI Prerequisites 1 To use the ToolBox web GUI you will need to download the latest version of Java by visiting hitp www java com The Web GUI will prompt you to do this if Java is not installed and you attempt to launch the ToolBox web GuUI 2 After updating to the latest version of Java you need to refresh your browser Opening the Web GUI amp Login 1 Attach an Ethernet cable to the ETH1 port on the codec 2 Press the SETTINGS button and select Unit to display the IP address programmed into your codec 3 Ensure your PC is connected to the same LAN 4 Open your web browser and type the IP address of your codec into the address bar of your browser e g http 192 168 0 xxx the last digits are the private address details unique to your codec over a private LAN 5 Refresh the browser and the web GUI application should launch automatically eS Tieling The Codec Company Toolbox Web Start Desktop Application This will download and launch the desktop Toolbox application that will allow you configure your codec A desktop shortcut will also be created Recommended Requires Java 7 Installation instructions will be provided if not available Toolbox Browser Applet This will launch ToolBox in a browser window Launch Requires Java 6 Installation instructions will be provi
195. itter buffer delay in a codec it is necessary to think carefully about the type of connection you will be using Following is a table displaying rule of thumb settings for programming jitter buffer delays into your codec Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 182 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Jitter Buffer Recommendation Private LAN 60 milliseconds 100 200 milliseconds 100 300 milliseconds Local Wireless Network 250 750 milliseconds Satellite IP 500 999 milliseconds International 100 400 milliseconds ci Important Note The preceding table assumes the use of the Tieline Music algorithms Do not use PCM uncompressed audio over highly contended DSL ADSL connections without enough bandwidth to support the high connection bit rates required 21 4 Configuring Forward Error Correction Forward Error Correction FEC is designed to increase the stability of UDP IP connections in the event that data packets are lost FEC works by sending a secondary stream of audio packets over a connection so that if your primary audio stream packets are lost or corrupted then packets from the secondary stream can be substituted to replace them The amount of FEC required depends on the number of data packets lost over the IP connection Both the local and remote codec FEC settings can be configured in your codec before dialing These settings can also be changed on the run while the codecs are connected FEC should only be used if the Se
196. ix rack mount codec 1 Use the G 722 algorithm 2 Connect using only one 64Kbps ISDN B Channel bonding of G 722 over two ISDN B channels is not possible Configuring the Matrix to Make an ISDN Call 1 Connect an ISDN line to the Matrix codec and power up the unit 2 Press 2 to select ISDN Status 3 Press Enter to configure the connection 4 Press 4 to select the Configure menu Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 213 5 Press 2 to select the Network menu 7 Press 4 to select Profiles and then press 1 to select Load Profile 8 Press 2 to select Store and program a new profile using the codec wizard 9 Press Enter to enter a profile number between 1 and 10 Note This will overwrite any previously stored profile 10 Next select the number for the ISDN Switch Type setting that is appropriate for your region e Press 4 to select Euro if you are connecting to a Euro ISDN service e Press 1 to select NI1 which is the most common in the US but check this with your Telco 11 If prompted by the menu use the keypad to enter the SPID number the line being used if this is required in your region Press Enter to store the new number Note Use the Cancel button to delete numbers 12 Next use the keypad to enter the LDN DN MSN number for the line being used Press Enter to store the new number Note Use the Cancel button to delete numbers 13 Enter a Qdial
197. jitter buffer or FEC setting Generally programs will be up or down mixed by the answering codec to match the loaded program type In some situations incompatible program types will be rejected A compatible program type can still connect and specify different connection parameters such as algorithm preferences and bit rates via session data Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Select Settings and press or Navigate to System and press fox Navigate to Lock Program and press to toggle between Enabled and Disabled A U N Stem Conta Language English h pute Lock Lock Program Disabled nF 5 When program lock is Enabled a warning message confirms program status ser program LOCKED An incoming calls not matching this program type will be 6 When program lock is Disabled a warning message confirms incoming calls may load any supported factory program a E User program UNLOCKED Incoming calls can load factory programs on demand 7 Press the RETURN button to exit the warning message Important Note It is only possible to lock custom programs in a codec If Lock Program is enabled and you load a new custom program in the codec Lock Program remains enabled and locks the most recently loaded custom program G Locking the Front Panel The codec features a front panel lock feature for tamper proof operation This feature is disabled by default There are two levels of pan
198. k on the rear panel By default the input is Off and can be configured by 1 Selecting the SETTINGS button 2 Navigate to Audio and press the button 3 Use the arrow down w button to select Aux Input and press the button to view menu options Audio Conta Input Level 4 26 5 7 InpUTIGC 4 4uto 2 Fined SMU Line 154 Mo Phantom Pwr IGC Auto Input settings which can be adjusted include e Input on off e Input level e Input Type High Gain Mic Medium Gain Mic Low Gain Mic Unbalanced and Line Level e Phantom power 15V available when enabled e IGC ci Important Note When the auxiliary input AUX IN is On the default mixer configuration sends audio to all inputs If you are not using the auxiliary input ensure it is Off to avoid additional noise in program audio Ganging Audio Channels It is possible to gang channels together and adjust the audio level of the ganged channels simultaneously When channels are ganged together e Both channels highlight together when selected e The gain setting for both channels is automatically set to match the gain level of the lowest of the two channels when ganging is first configured e f one channel is turned on when ganging is first configured then the other one will be turned on automatically Press the SETTINGS button Navigate to Audio and press or Use the down Ww navigation button to highlight Input Level and press the button Navigate to th
199. l In this mode once the codec answers a call it expects to receive Tieline session data from the caller and configure its own algorithm settings according to that If it fails to receive Tieline session data within 5 seconds i e a non Tieline codec is calling or a Tieline codec with session data disabled it will use the settings in the ISDN Answering Config instead Enable Sessionless Only when answering ISDN calls from non Tieline codecs only When Sessionless is configured the codec will not wait for the session data This reduces the time taken to answer an inbound sessionless call 8 Select the default algorithm when receiving a call from a non Tieline codec then press the button ISOM Answer Conta 1 Alagonthm ees WFP hone WP Stereo 9 Specify the audio stream Route when receiving a call on the answering codec from a non Tieline codec then press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 39 ISOM Answer Conta 1 Route O o Route 2 Poyte 3 10 Select Yes and then press the button to confirm all changes ISOM Answer Conta 1 Confirm Changes Save ISDH Answer Contig 17 Reset ISDN Answer Configs To reset ISDN answering settings to factory defaults 1 Navigate to Settings gt Answering gt ISDN Answer Configs gt Reset ISDN Answer Configs and then press the button ISOM Answer Contas Coanig 4 i Ci B Taw t H one Reset ISOM Answer Contias 2 Select Yes and pre
200. laint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The Telephone Company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the Telephone Company will provide advance notice for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience problems with this equipment contact TIELINE Pty Ltd 25 Irvine Drive Malaga Western Australia 6090 Ph 61 8 9249 6688 Fax 61 8 9249 6858 email info tieline com web page www tieline com for repair and warranty information lf the problem is causing harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved No user serviceable parts are contained in this product If damage or malfunction occurs contact TIELINE Pty Ltd for instructions on repair or return This equipment cannot be used on a telephone company provided coin service Connection to Party Line service is subject to state tariffs Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 223 22 12 Software Licences This product uses a combination of proprietary and open source software programs Some of the software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under various open source licenses e g GNU General Public License v2 GNU Lesser GPL v2 1 A detailed list of open source licenses used in this product
201. ld The percentage of lost data measured during a given time frame 2 Time Frame The time frame against which lost data is measured 3 Keep Alive The keep connection alive time before failing over to a backup connection Tieline RTP pings every second to confirm connectivity E Automatic Resume Select the check box to configure fail back to a higher priority connection 5 Stable Time The amount of time a primary connection must remain Stable before attempting to fail back from the backup connection 6 Maximum Retries The maximum number of fail back retries a codec can try before ending fail back attempts 7 Time Frame The time frame used to measure the number of fail back retries attempted 2 Enter a name for the backup connection and click Next Program Summary 3 Click Next to continue through the wizard and configure the backup connection in a similar manner to how you have configured the primary connection Configure the Bidirectional IFB Audio Stream When you have finished configuring SmartStream PLUS Auto Reconnect or a backup connection proceed with configuration of the IFB audio stream in the wizard 1 Enter the IFB Audio Stream name and configure the codec to Dial only Then click Next It is also possible to select an Dial Route if required When routing multiple audio streams over transports like ISDN or POTS you can use Dial and Answer Routes to configure deterministic of routing audio streams Use
202. le from the favorite menu Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 18 18 Merlin Algorithm Profiles The following algorithm profiles are programmed into Merlin codecs I e Algorithm Mono Stereo Sample Rate kHz Bit rate kbps C F G HE AAC Mono 32 16 HE AAC Stereo 32 24 HE AAC Stereo 32 48 E AAC LD Mono 32 48 8 AAC LD Stereo 32 64 9 AAC ELD Mono 32 24 10 AAC ELD Stereo 32 48 11 aptX Enhanced Mono 32 16 bit 128 12 aptX Enhanced Mono 48 24 bit 288 13 aotX Enhanced Stereo 32 16 bit 256 14 aotX Enhanced Stereo 24 bit 576 15 G 711 Mono 64 16 G 722 Mono P 16 64 17 MPEG 1 Layer 2 J Stereo 32 128 18 MPEG 1 Layer 2 J Stereo 48 192 19 MPEG 1 Layer 2 Mono 24 64 20 MPEG 1 Layer 2 Mono 48 256 21 MPEG 1 Layer 2 Stereo 32 128 22 MPEG 1 Layer 2 Stereo 48 256 23 Music Mono 32 28 8 24 Music Mono 32 48 25 Music Stereo 32 64 26 Music Stereo 32 96 27 Music PLUS Mono 48 48 28 MusicPLUS Mono 48 96 29 MusicPLUS Stereo E 96 30 MusicPLUS Stereo 128 31 Music PLUS Stereo E E 192 32 PCM Mono Mono 48 16bit 768 PCM Stereo Stereo 48 16bit 1 540 34 Opus Mono Mono 48 64 35 Opus Stereo Stereo 48 128 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 18 19
203. lity available on your PC is traceroute This tool can be used to determine the route and number of hops that data packets are taking to their destination codec This is useful because the more routers that packets traverse the more latency your connection will have and the less reliable it will be i Point to the start menu on your PC and click once ii In the search text box type Run and press Enter iii Type CMD in the Run dialog text box and click OK iv Type tracert the IP address of the codec you are contacting i e tracert 203 36 205 163 and press the Enter key on your keyboard Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 202 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 22 6 22 1 22 7 1 Testing ISDN Connections To test your ISDN line is working you can dial a standard phone line or your cell phone number If the call is successful this verifies the line is active To verify ISDN data is being sent you can e Dial a codec you know is connected to an active ISDN line e g another codec in your network or a Tieline test codec e Dial the test ISDN data number provided by your Telco when available e Create a program and perform a loopback test by dialing out on the main ISDN number and receive the call on the auxiliary ISDN number Note To create a loopback program create a 2 x Mono or Stereo Peer to Peer program and configure a dial only audio stream using your main ISDN number For the second audio stream create an answer only audio stream c
204. lt Any will select ETH1 if it is available and ETH2 if it is unavailable T Important Note The Send Audio Port is the codec port at the remote end of the link to which you are sending audio The Return Audio Port is used by the local codec to receive audio from the remote codec When Tieline Codecs is the Session Protocol selected using Tieline session data the default port value for the Return Audio Port is Automatic Note Automatic indicates that the codec will arbitrarily allocate the return port value and send this information to the codec to which you are dialing Click to deselect the Automatic check box and change this setting When you select Sessionless as the Session Protocol the Session Port is not configurable and you can manually configure the Send Audio Port and Return Audio Port Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 124 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Click Save Program to save the program with the default algorithm jitter and FEC settings which are physically entered in the codec Alternatively click Next to specify individual algorithm jitter buffer and FEC settings and configure a backup connection or SmartStream PLUS for this audio stream recommended Note If you connect multiple remote codecs simultaneously to a Merlin PLUS codec at the studio when creating 2 x Mono or Stereo Peer to Peer IFB connections use Send Audio Port 9020 to configure the second mono stereo dialing connection at the studio Mono or stereo audi
205. ly depending on features available and the transport selected e g IP or ISDN e t is possible to save a program at several points throughout the program wizard and use default settings to save configuration time e Failover and SmartStream PLUS redundant streaming are not available with SIP or sessionless IP connections e POTS is not supported for stereo audio stream connections e To learn more about programs see the section titled About Program Dialing 1 Open the web GUI and click the Programs symbol at the top of the screen to display the Programs panel 2 Click the New Program button to open the wizard and e Click in the text box to name the new program e Select Mono Stereo Peer to Peer or if you want to use an existing program as a template select this option Then click Next 2 POJI P Salen A Important Note When you decide to use an existing program as a template the new program inherits all the settings of the template program and you can adjust these settings as required by continuing through the program wizard Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 109 3 Enter a name for the Audio Stream and configure the codec to dial answer or dial and answer Then click Next It is also possible to select a Dial Route or Answer Route if required When routing multiple audio streams over transports like ISDN or POTS you can use Dial and Answer Routes to configure deterministic rou
206. m cannot be unloaded by a codec dialing in with different program settings For example if your routing requirements require the codec at the studio to always connect in mono simply load and lock a mono program in the codec Generally programs will be up or down mixed by the answering codec to match the loaded program type In some situations incompatible program types will be rejected Defining Audio Streams within Programs Each audio stream within a program can be defined separately and contain a variety of settings relating to the number of connections e g primary and backup and the number of destinations to which each audio stream is distributed Each audio stream is capable of being configured to include dial and answer connections dial connections only or answer connections only Each audio stream has its own e Name e Connection Transport and Destination settings e Backup configuration options The following image displays a simple peer to peer program in the Programs panel within the Toolbox web GUI which can be used to configure and edit all program parameters The program displayed is configured to send a single stereo audio stream and will allow the codec to both answer and dial wa dialing and answering connections if required A backup dialing connection is configured in case the primary connection fails Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 48 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Creating Programs Only the simplest peer t
207. me p i Dialing configuration settings for this POTS audio stream are now complete Configuring a Backup Connection or Auto Reconnect At this point in the wizard you can choose to configure Auto Reconnect or create a backup Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 127 connection for the audio stream you are configuring Important Note When Auto Reconnect is enabled the dialing codec will continue to attempt a connection with the remote codec until Disconnect is pressed either on the dialing codec s keypad or in the web GUI To configure a backup connection 1 Click to select the check box for Create a Backup Connection Adjust the parameters and click Next 1 Deselect Create a Backup Connection to disable Backup 2 Enter the Lost Data Threshold percentage 3 Enter the Lost Data Time Frame in milliseconds 500 30000 4 Enter the Keep Alive Time in seconds 3 30 before fail over 5 Select if the connection should support Automatic Resume 6 Enter the Automatic Resume Stable Time in seconds 15 60 7 Enter the number of Maximum Connection Retries 1 10 8 Enter the Automatic Resume Time Frame for retries in minutes 10 60 lt Back Next gt Cancel Note The explanations wthin the followng table can be used to assist wth backup connection configuration Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 128 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 __ Screen Display Descrip on Z Z Z 1 Thresho
208. mes To adjust this setting 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Select LAN and press the button 3 Use the down W navigation button to select ETH1 ETH2 or a VLAN interface 4 Select IPv6 Mode and press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 170 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 5 Select Auto Manual or Off and press the button By default the codec is configured to allow the codec to automatically receive IPv6 address information from an IPv6 enabled router Manual IPv6 Address Assignment select Manual mode using the previous procedure and enter information into the IPv6 Static Address IPv6 Prefix and IPv6 Gateway fields in the codec to manually configure address details DNS Server It is possible to specify Domain Name Server DNS settings to allow easy look up of codecs within the specified DNS Addresses or Domains section within the web GUI This feature can be turned on or off in the LAN codec menu 1 2 3 4 5 Press the SETTINGS button Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select LAN and press the button Use the down W navigation button to select ETH1 ETH2 or a VLAN interface Use the down W navigation button to scroll to Auto DNS Press the button to toggle between Yes and No VLAN ID VLAN configuration only The VLAN ID is encapsulated in IP packets to facilitate routing throughout your network ok OON N O Press the SETTINGS button Use the navigation buttons on t
209. ms depending on the algorithm you select e Local and Remote FEC settings if required ISDN module answering settings For For POTS settings are determined by POTS module answering settings For more details see Configuring POTS Answering 10 After configuring all settings there are 2 options i If you want to create another answering connection select the check box for Create another answering connection and continue through the wizard ll Click Save Program to save all program settings The newly created program will be displayed in the left pane within the Programs panel and in the Master panel This program will now allow incoming codec calls to establish 1 x Stereo Peer to Peer IFB connections and stream audio according to the input output and port assignments indicated at the beginning of this section Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 138 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 20 9 Configure Multicast Client Programs A Important Notes Before you commence program configuration please note 7 e Ensure all connection related settings like the port algorithm bit rate etc match on both multicast server and client programs or they will not connect successfully e You cannot edit a program when it is currently loaded in the codec e You can lock_a loaded custom program in a codec to ensure the currently loaded program cannot be unloaded by a codec dialing in with a different program type e Some drop down menus and settings may be gr
210. n Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select Connect and press the button Select IP and press the button Select your preferred IP Session mode and press the button Use the down W navigation button to select Setup and press the button Navigate to Jitter Buffer and press or Select Auto Jitter Adapt and press or Select your preferred jitter buffer setting and press or O N OO A W N gt Important Notes e Automatic jitter buffering is disabled for a PCM linear uncompressed audio connection e There is no jitter buffer setting on a multicast server codec because it only sends and never receives audio packets How to get the Best Jitter Buffer Results When programming automatic jitter buffer settings establish the IP connection for a while before going live to let the codec evaluate the prevailing network conditions The initial jitter buffer setting when a codec connects is 500ms and it is kept at this level for the first minute of connection as long as observed delay values are lower than this point After the initial connection period the jitter buffer is adapted to suit the current network conditions and is usually reduced Establish a connection for at least 5 minutes prior to broadcasting so that the codec has been provided with enough jitter history to ensure a reliable connection There are five jitter buffer states Jitter buffer and connection status statistics can b
211. n When multiple audio streams are connected navigate to the one you want to view in the Connections screen e g ISDN and press the button to view more details Connected ISOM 00 00 40 op Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 se Merlin User Manual v 1 4 18 5 Steps to Connect over POTS The following procedure explains how to create a custom peer to peer program and dial another Tieline codec over POTS using the front panel keypad and navigation buttons lt i Important Notes See POTS Connection Tips and Precautions for valuable information about setting up and maintaining reliable POTS connections e See POTS Module Settings for details on module settings e See POTS Answering Configuration for details on POTS answering settings required for answering calls from non Tieline POTS codecs e See Configuring POTS for details on configuring codec connections via a computer e The Local and Remote line quality displayed for POTS Codec connections is related to the actual POTS line quality at either end of the link This reading affects the maximum allowable bit rate when the codec is training and negotiating a connection 1 Press and press and release the right gt arrow button to open the Input Audio Level adjustment screen e Press the number on the keypad corresponding to the channel you want to toggle on or off E g press O on the numeric keypad to toggle channel 1 on and off e Use the up and down Ww navigation buttons to
212. navigation buttons to select Language and press or 4 Select a language and press or Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 15 About Program Dialing What Defines a Program Tieline Genie and Merlin codecs use programs to connect to another codec A Program configures a Tieline codec to send or receive one or more Audio Streams based upon the particular application the codec is being used for at any given time The attributes of the audio stream and associated connections are embodied within a program when it is created including the configuration dialing and answering parameters Tieline Genie and Merlin codecs operate similarly to Tieline G3 codecs By default Tieline codecs send proprietary session data when connecting to each other in order to establish manage and terminate connections When a connection between two codecs is established 1 The dialing codec sends information about how the codec receiving the call should be configured 2 Once the codec receiving session data from the dialing codec has received information successfully it sends an acknowledgement to the dialing codec and streaming can commence For example if you configure a standard stereo program on the dialing codec using a particular algorithm and bit rate settings etc these settings will be configured on the dialing codec when the codec connects It is also possible to lock_a loaded program in a codec to ensure the currently loaded progra
213. nd Return link quality percentage displayed on the codec is below 99 as it is of no benefit otherwise Programming FEC into the Codec Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select Connect and press the button Select IP and press the button Select Tieline and press the button Use the down WY navigation button to select Setup and press the button Navigate to FEC and press for Select the local codec FEC setting in the Local FEC screen and press or Select the remote codec FEC setting in the Remote FEC screen and press or CON OO FW YP The four FEC settings in Tieline codecs are outlined in the following table with their bit rate ratios Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 183 100 A simultaneous dual redundant Recommended to be used over Lowest stream 1 1 ratio is sent from the wireless and international delay codec Twice the connection bit connections rate is required to operate the codec using the 100 setting E g if your connection is 14 400kbps you will require an additional 14 400 kbps of bandwidth to allow for the FEC data stream 50 Additional data is sent using FEC Recommended for international amp in a ratio of 2 1 national connections 33 Additional data is sent using FEC Recommended Danena a A national and local in a ratio of 3 1 Danena a A 20 Highest Additional data is sent us
214. ndant streaming over both Ethernet ports mitigates lost packets on either link and will provide IP network backup if an IP link is lost To learn more about SmartStream PLUS redundant IP streaming see htip www tieline com Transports SmartStream IP ispn For ISDN connections enter a number and select which B channel to use Select the Enable bonded connections check box to configure and bond multiple B channels EEN a Next click Save Program to save the program with default algorithm settings or click Next to specify a different algorithm and configure a backup connection if required recommended Dialing settings for this ISDN audio stream are now complete Select POTS Codec in the Mode drop down menu to encode decode using POTS or select Analog Phone to configure a standard analog phone call then click Next TEEF y ee ee ee R s POTS E S 4 a k mi Next enter the phone number of the codec or device you want to dial When multiple POTS modules are installed click the Via drop down menu and select Module 1 or Module 2 to specify which POTS module will dial Next click Save Program to save the program with default settings or click Next to specify algorithm settings and Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 132 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 configure a backup connection if required recommended Dialing configuration settings for this POTS audio stream are now complete
215. ne ISDN Codec dials sessionless at all times e MHI z R ens Pe sss ha with with no Session Data e Answer Routes can be used to link Kinia the Answer Route ie incoming calls with audio streams in w 7 settings in the the answering codec s Program Answering Program Answering Multiple ISDN Calls from Tieline and non Tieline Codecs Tieline codecs capable of answering multiple incoming audio streams can be configured to answer both Tieline session data and sessionless ISDN calls at different times They can also support connections using other transports such as IP or POTS The following example shows how a Tieline codec can be configured to answer up to 4 separate mono ISDN calls at different times from both Tieline and non Tieline codecs as well as two mono IP audio streams Tieline Merlin PLUS Codec at the Studio Configured with an Answering Program which allows e 4 simultaneous ISDN audio stream connections e 2 simultaneous IP audio stream connections e Both ISDN modules support both Tieline and non Tieline sessionless ISDN calls as required All ISDN connections are deterministic and route consistently using dial and answer routes Remote Merlin Codec 1 with ISON Session Data Enabled Pinas Audo n eam Dials ISDN Module 1 B syeam DUIE j A s carly Channel 1 when required lt using Dial Route 1 e Tieline Codec Program manages dial and answering configuration Algorithm settings sent e Dial Rou
216. nfig Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 96 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Bonding Setting Behavior Unbonded Only Unbonded single B Channel Bonded or Unbonded May Calls using the same algorithm from the same Tieline codec Bond or sessionless calls will attempt to bond when received Calls using incompatible algorithms will not be bonded Bonded Only Will only bond compatible algorithms This mode will reject incompatible calls which cannot be bonded e g G 711 and G 722 Dial and Answer Route Settings in Programs Dial Route and Answer Route tags allow you to associate a B channel or channels in a Config with a particular incoming audio stream from either Tieline or non Tieline codecs This is not necessary in simple point to point ISDN audio stream configurations however it is very useful in multiple audio stream codecs using multiple B channels When dialing Tieline to Tieline over ISDN using the Merlin or Genie family of codecs you can configure a Dial Route in the dialing codec s program and a corresponding Answer Route in the answering codec s program This will ensure a particular audio stream is routed between two codecs consistently In principle the concept of routes operates similarly to how audio ports are used to route multiple audio streams over IP Selecting different IP audio port numbers allows users to define which incoming IP audio stream is routed to a specific answering audio stream configuration on the code
217. nfiguration ci Important Notes e See Web GUIL Introduction for details on configuring connections remotely via a computer e See Installing the Codec at the Studio for valuable information about installing your codec negotiating firewalls and port forwarding e See Tips for Creating Reliable IP Connections for a range of IP information to assist with setting up IP services for your codecs e See Testing IP Network Connections to learn how you can test and verify the reliability of your IP connection 1 Press and press and release the right gt arrow button to open the Input Audio Level adjustment screen e Press the number on the keypad corresponding to the channel you want to toggle on or off E g press O on the numeric keypad to toggle channel 1 on and off e Use the up and down Ww navigation buttons to select the gang function and press the button to toggle ganging on off e Use the up and down Ww navigation buttons to select a single channel or ganged channels Note A channel is highlighted when selected e Use the left and right gt navigation buttons to adjust the input levels up or down 2 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen select Connect gt IP gt Tieline and press the button Note Select SIP or Sessionless instead of Tieline if these connections are required 3 Use the RETURN button to delete any numbers if already entered then use the numeric KEYPAD to enter the IP address o
218. ng are not available with SIP connections e To learn more about programs see the section titled About Program Dialing 1 Open the web GUI and click the Programs symbol at the top of the screen to display the Programs panel 2 Click the New Program button to open the wizard and e Click in the Program Name text box to name the new program e Select Mono Stereo Peer to Peer or if you want to use an existing program as a template select this option Then click Next m p2p rsp Important Notes When you choose to use an existing program as a template the new program inherits all the settings of the template program and you can adjust these settings as required by continuing through the program wizard 3 Enter a name for the Audio Stream and configure the codec to dial answer or dial and answer Then click Next Note The following example will display how to configure a dial and answer program If you want the codec to either dial or answer only select the option and the wizard will automatically display screens to allow you to configure the codec correctly Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 aa Merlin User Manual v 1 4 4 This audio stream connection in the wizard will allow the codec to dial Enter the name of the connection in the text box then click Next 5 Follow the instructions on the right hand side of the panel to configure the transport settings for the connection Ensure that you select e IP as th
219. non Tieline codec you will need to create an answering Config to determine which module in the codec will answer the call and the settings used when connecting Important Notes e POTS Answer Config settings are applied to POTS Codec connections and not Analog Phone connections e When receiving a call from a Tieline codec with session data enabled i e not Sessionless the algorithm setting from the dialing codec overrides the setting in the POTS Answer Config menu POTS Config Settings The default POTS Answer module Config settings are e Tieline Codecs Session Data e The Other algorithm This configuration will accept the settings from an incoming Tieline codec when it dials with session data enabled It will also allow the codec to answer a call from a Comrex POTS codec Supporting the Other algorithm setting Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 103 les Sanhkee ee 5 n pr E Network Options Audio SIP T Modules ISDN Answer Firmware Licensing Reset Restore Config y y Save settings Answering Calls from Non Tieline POTS Codecs Select the Sessionless Only check box when non Tieline codecs only are dialing a Tieline codec over POTS This allows you to choose the default encoding setting and Route the incoming call to a nominated audio stream via a corresponding Answer Route in the answering codec program if
220. ntains useful information for configuring port forwarding and troubleshooting IP connections Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 186 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Changing Codec Port Numbers Reasons for adjusting the port setting on your codec include e Creating a path through gateways and firewalls e Another IP device is already using a codec s port number e More than one studio codec is in use and each codec requires a different port number Configuring the Session and Audio Port Numbers used when Dialing a Program For two codecs to connect they need to be configured with matching port numbers If there is a need to change codec port settings in most situations you should consult your organization s resident IT professional To adjust either the session or audio port numbers for a particular connection within a program Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select Connect and press the button Select IP and press the button Select your preferred IP Session mode and press the button Use the down W navigation button to select Setup and press the button Navigate to either Session session protocol or Protocol audio protocols and press or Select the session or audio port you want and press for Use the numeric KEYPAD to add a new port number and press or CON OO FW YP Changing the Tieline Session Ports when Answering To adjust the local Ti
221. nto the module slot and ensure the base of the module remains flat during insertion to ensure it lines up correctly with the module connector within the codec Reinsert the 4 screws to hold the module firmly in place Power up the codec Press the SETTINGS button to verify it is installed correctly Navigate to Modules and press the button The newly installed module should be visible as Module 1 or Module 2 NO NO OF AO a Important Note If the module does not appear in the Modules menu in the codec it is 7 possible that the connector on the module has not lined up correctly with the connector inside the codec Remove the module and reinsert it carefully to resolve this issue Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 33 12 About ISDN Modules ISDN stands for Integrated Services Digital Network The Basic Rate Interface BRI of ISDN consists of 2 bearer B channels at 64 kbps each and 1 data D channel at 16 kbps i e 2B D This can be provided over a 2 wire facility and the two B channels can be bonded together to form a single 128kbps channel The B channel can carry user information such as voice video or data The D channel carries signaling information between a user and the network Tieline codecs fitted with an ISDN G5 module can provide high quality mono or stereo audio over a single B channel using the Tieline Music algorithm If you have 2 B channels you can use one as a standby or conf
222. o and remote codecs use the same ISP This can substantially increase reliability audio bandwidth and reduce audio delay Using the same service provider nationally can give better results than using different local service providers This is especially true if one of the service providers is a cheap low end domestic service provider which buys its bandwidth from other ISPs Second and third tier providers sublease bandwidth from first tier provders and can result in connection reliability issues due to multiple switch hops We also highly recommend using First Tier ISPs if connecting two codecs in different countries 3 Sign up for a business plan that provides better performance than domestic or residential plans Business plans typically have a fixed data limit per month with an additional cost for data beyond that limit In addition Service Level Agreements SLA will often provide better Support and response times in the event of a connection failure Domestic plans are often speed limited or shaped when usage exceeds a predefined limit These plans are cheap but they are dangerous for streaming broadcast audio 4 Ensure that the speed of the connection for both codecs is adequate for the job The minimum upload speed recommended is 256 kbps for a studio codec and 64 kbps for a field unit Connection 5 Use good quality equipment to connect your codecs to the internet Tieline successfully uses Cisco switching and routing equipmen
223. o 60 seconds to connect successtully N with SIP or sessionless IP connections SmartStream PLUS Redundant IP Streaming Tieline s proprietary SmartStream PLUS IP technology ensures you re always on the air The codec features dual Ethernet IP ports allowing two completely independent IP connections There are three levels to SmartStream PLUS IP streaming Important Note Failover and SmartStream PLUS redundant streaming are not available 1 The codec can stream simultaneous redundant data streams from both Ethernet ports and deliver seamless redundancy by switching back and forth without loss of audio from the nominated primary data link to the backup link if one fails and then subsequently recovers Use IP links from two different IP network providers for optimal redundancy over mission critical connections 2 Second when multiple redundant audio streams are sent the decoding codec automatically reconstructs audio into a single stream on a first packet arrived basis to minimize program latency and ensure audio integrity 3 Third SmartStream features automated jitter buffer management and Forward Error Correction FEC and these advanced network management tools deliver uncompromising audio quality while dynamically responding to variable conditions over unmanaged IP networks like the internet These combined measures ensure Tieline is capable of offering a rock solid IP audio solution for Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 M
224. o over this audio stream connection will be routed via audio inputs outputs 3 and 4 on the studio Merlin PLUS codec Click the drop down arrows on the right hand side of each text box to adjust the Encoding Sample rate and Bit rate options een ee For IP connections click to configure e Auto Jitter Adapt and the preferred auto jitter setting using the drop down arrow for Buffer priority or e Fixed Buffer Level and enter the Jitter Depth which must be between 12ms and 5000ms depending on the algorithm you select e Local and Remote FEC settings if required Click the check box to select Enable Redundant SmartStream PLUS and configure dual Ethernet SmartStream IP streaming Alternatively click Next to configure Auto Reconnect or a backup connection whereby the alternative connection is dialed if the primary connection fails Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 125 By default primary IP streaming is va ETH1 To achieve the maximum level of redundancy select Secondary to configure redundant streaming from the secondary IP port ETH2 The redundant stream uses Send Audio Port 9001 by default and the Return Audio Port allocated is Automatic Note Automatic indicates that the codec will arbitrarily allocate the return port value and send this information to the codec to which you are dialing vi Automatic secondary lt H D Important Note Dual SmartStream PLUS redundant streaming over both Eth
225. o peer point to point programs can be created using the codec front panel The Toolbox_web GUI contains a Programs panel with a wizard for configuring program settings and backup connections Edit settings easily at the touch of a button and use existing programs as templates for creating other programs Mono and Stereo Peer to Peer Programs New peer to peer programs can be created using the codec front panel keypad see Steps_to Connect over IP If you know the IP address of the codec you want to dial then all you need to do is enter this into the codec choose your preferred connection settings and then press CONNECT L Front panel configured programs are automatically saved as Recent Programs which retain all the audio stream dialing and configuration information These Recent Programs are displayed when you press the CONNECT button from within any menu except the IP Mode or SIP Mode screens or the Connect IP or Connect SIP screens Ensure you configure all the correct connection settings when using the codec front panel because these are stored as part of the program s profile when you first connect They cannot be adjusted afterwards without using the editing features in the Program panel within the Toolbox web GUI cd Important Note When configuring a connection use the Save function in the Connect lt IP and Connect SIP screens to save programs permanently to the codec s Programs menu Otherwise they are stored to the Recent
226. odecs is the Session Protocol selected using Tieline session data the default port value for the Return Audio Port is Automatic Note Automatic indicates that the codec will arbitrarily allocate the return port value and send this information to the codec to which you are dialing Click to deselect the Automatic check box and change this setting When you select Sessionless as the Session Protocol the Session Port is not configurable and you can manually configure the Send Audio Port and Return Audio Port Click Save Program to save the program with the default algorithm jitter and FEC settings which are physically entered in the codec Alternatively click Next to specify individual algorithm jitter buffer and FEC settings and configure a backup connection or SmartStream PLUS for this audio stream recommended Click the drop down arrows on the right hand side of each text box to adjust the Encoding Sample rate and Bit rate options a Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 11 For IP connections click to configure e Auto Jitter Adapt and the preferred auto jitter setting using the drop down arrow for Buffer priority or e Fixed Buffer Level and enter the Jitter Depth which must be between 12ms and 5000ms depending on the algorithm you select e Local and Remote FEC settings if required ig BestCompromise E Click the check box to select Enable Redundant SmartStream PLUS and configure dual E
227. oice amp Data EIJ ETSI nde Important Notes Directory Numbers and Multiple Subscriber Numbers Directory Numbers DN in North America and Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN in the rest of the world are simply phone numbers associated with an ISDN B channel like lines listed in a typical phone directory Your Telco will normally supply 2 DN MSN numbers for each pair of B channels However these numbers may or may not be associated with a specific B channel Often broadcasters prefer to predict which B channel will answer an incoming call to ensure audio routing is consistent However if a DN or MSN number is not entered in the codec and multiple B channels are available the codec may use any channel to answer an incoming call To ensure calls are routed consistently enter a DN MSN number without the country or area code as the DN MSN for a B channel then only that corresponding B channel will answer an incoming call to that number Programming DN MSN numbers for each B channel allows the codec to ignore calls without matching DN Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 MSN numbers This is the best way to answer calls from codecs in a predictable manner SPID Numbers in North America ISDN relies on an initialization procedure for associating Service Profiles with specific terminating equipment e g your audio codec rather than lines In the US Telcos assign a Service Profile ID SPID number which assis
228. ompromise Proto UOPAP FTP 9000 5 Use the navigation buttons to select an algorithm profile or manually choose algorithm settings then press or Set 4lqonthm 6 Click to configure the Jitter Buffer from either Auto Jitter Adapt or Fixed Buffer Level then and enter the Jitter Depth which must be between 12ms and 5000ms depending on the algorithm you select then press or IF Connect Setuo fhicast C1 Alg iMusic Mone 32k 28 Skbps JitBut Auto Best Compromise Proto UDPAF RTP 3000 ci Important Notes Automatic or fixed jitter buffer settings can be adjusted on individual client codecs as required There is no jitter buffer setting on the server codec because it never receives audio packets 7 Select Protocol to select the audio protocol and adjust the Send Audio Port and Return Audio Port Select UDP IP RTP for RFC compliant IP streaming Press to save settings IF Connect Setup fhdcast C1 8 If required enable Auto Reconnect and use Via to specify which IP streaming interface is used to dial this connection e g Primary port ETH1 or Secondary port ETH2 Note By default Any will select ETH1 if it is available and ETH2 if it is unavailable IF Connect Seto fticast C1 Proto UDPAF RTP 3000 Auto Rheconr Disabled 9 Press the RETURN button when configuration is complete to navgate backwards to the Connect IP screen that the multicast IP address was entered into Tieline Pty L
229. onnection configured for ISDN If you dial the connection and can hear the audio you are sending on the return B channel you have confirmed ISDN data is being sent successfully If you dial using a loopback program and a disconnect error message similar to the following image appears you may have the incorrect Line Type configured 92497622 Disconnected i Call clearing unspecified Change the Line Type setting and this should hopefully resolve the issue On Demand ISDN Services lf Syne appears for approximately 60 seconds when you connect an ISDN line to the codec and then disappears or if Sync does not appear and you know you are connected to an active ISDN interface then the line may have On demand enabled by your Telco To test this you can dial a codec on an ISDN line Known to be operational Dial over ISDN and if Syne appears after connecting it indicates the service has now been activated Disconnect and then dial again If this dial is successful On Demand is enabled We recommend you contact your network service provider and get them to disable On Demand to circumvent any possible connection issues Connecting Tieline ISDN to other Codecs To dial from a Tieline codec to a non Tieline codec it is necessary to disable Session Data and use an algorithm like G 722 or MPEG Layer 2 for compatibility The same settings must be configured at both ends for Mono or stereo Encoding Algorithm Sample Rate
230. onnel Remove both power leads from the codec before removing the cover All parts are mounted on plugs and only a Philips screwdriver is required Ensure that fan mounting lugs are not hooked out by the cover Maintenance Schedule Tieline recommends a three year maintenance schedule which includes the following procedures to be completed 1 Evacuate all dust from the unit and clean vents 2 Replace both PSUs 3 Replace the fan Controlled rack environments may allow a longer maintenance cycle Uncontrolled environments where temperatures are elevated may require a shorter maintenance cycle Tieline recommends that the racks in which codecs are installed are thoroughly evacuated to ensure proper airflow from the bottom to the top Where space is available a 1RU gap between codecs will assist in minimizing internal temperature build up Tieline has incorporated dual redundant PSUs and backup alarm features to assist in maintaining reliable operations The fan has been carefully chosen for long life operation and should not be replaced by a cheaper equivalent Fan speed control circuitry reduces the fan speed as internal rack temperatures fall below 25 degrees Celsius This greatly extends the working life of the fan and the codec If rack temperatures are elevated above 25 degrees Celsius the fan speed will increase to reduce CPU temperature Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 1a 22 2 Installing the Codec at the
231. ono IFB 1 Merlin PLUS Studio Codec Bidirectional stereo remote audio 2 remote UDP Audio UDP Audio audio 2 nput Outpu UDP Audio UDP Audio nput Outpu 3 amp 4 Port 9021 Port 9021 1 amp 2 UDP Audio UDP Audio Aux Input Output Bidirectional Mono IFB2 7 E m Port 9030 Port 9030 or Input Output 3 ae a lt j _ SmartStream P Bidirectional stereo remote audio 2 nput Outpu 1 amp 2 nput Outpu 3 amp 4 redundant SmartStream PLUS redundant remote audio 2 Remote Site 2 SmartStream PLUS SmartStream PLUS redundant Mono IFB 2 artStrea UDP Audio UDP Audio redundant Mono IFB 2 Port 9031 Port 9031 or Input Output 3 2 x Mono Stereo Peer to Peer IFB Remotes dialing Merlin PLUS at the studio The following setup instructions describe how to configure a stereo audio stream and IFB audio stream with a backup connection in order to connect with a Merlin or Merlin PLUS codec at the studio Configuring a Mono or Stereo Audio Stream Dialing A Important Notes Before you commence program configuration please note e The auxiliary input is used by default for the IFB communications channel in Merlin codecs In Merlin PLUS codecs the auxiliary input and XLR input 3 are mixed together by default for 1 x Mono Stereo Peer to Peer IFB programs e You cannot edit a program when it is currently loaded in the codec e You can lock _a loaded custom program in a codec to ensure the currently loaded p
232. ons osissa a a S E REE SEA 57 5 Steps to Connect OVER POTS sicscccsscnscescesncsccncsssscacavaresataenuaeseonetesceasuncsnaseasneneeetecnasnenesens 58 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Contents 3 6 Monitoring POTS Connections sssssnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 60 7 Load and Dial Custom ProgramS c cccceceeeeceeeeeeeeneeeenseseeeseseeseseesnseeensesonseseesaeeesnenees 61 8 Disconnecting a Connection sescinscnwiciecac rece cccwevosecannctatsesserievadecdenuwowceteavercewsanvesstiweedvcceudes 61 9 Redialing a Connec sisis a a a aes 62 19 Conpfiig ring Auto R conNeCi iseis a a a aa 62 11 Speed Dialing Connections susuununnnnnunnnnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm 62 12 Dial Disconnect Multiple Audio Stream Programs ccccceeceeeeceeseeeeeeeeeenseenseeeeseeeeees 63 13 Dialing SIP Peerto Pe r oraaa a EAE aE AEAEE aO 64 14 _DIAIING SIP Addr SSCS eiiscicccceesttecictrctiateieveceschtapeeboctecseaimectsuspesteetestscuaesonesaanecdsetuesteeneets 65 15 Creating a Multicast Client Program sssssssssnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 65 16 D lietng Progra mS oisssiieie ia E EE aa 68 17 Selecting Algortthm Profiles sessiosta ara aa a ASAE EEE 69 18 Merlin Algorithm Profiles ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeoeeeoeseseeeanensneneaeaeananes 71 19 Merlin Back p ODUONS sissiececvesecccsiiecstiitecececentiaepea
233. ontrol 22 metering 22 phantom power 22 quick adjustment of levels 22 selecting analog 22 Auto Reconnect operation 62 programming of 62 Aux out configure 30 Auxiliary input audio levels 22 configuration 22 phantom power 22 Auxiliary output configure and adjust 30 Backup how it works 72 C Certifications 221 Compliances 221 Configuration check IP details 168 DHCP IP addresses 168 FEC 182 forward error correction 182 IP addresses 168 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Configuration IPv4 IPV6 168 jitter buffer 178 Static IP addresses 168 via front panel 168 web GUI software 76 Configuration files backup 151 restore 151 Configure connections 88 Configure Ethernet ports 88 Configure QOS 88 Configure VLANs 88 Connecting 49 default algorithm profiles 69 dialing 50 dialing ISDN 55 dialing POTS 58 disconnecting 61 first steps 49 50 hanging up 61 how to connect 50 how to connect ISDN 55 how to connect POTS 58 speed dialing 62 Connection IP link quality 52 IP statistics 52 Connections AC power 11 AES3 11 analog 11 Ethernet 11 headphone output 11 opto isolated outputs 11 rear panel 11 Rear Panel Connections 11 relay inputs 11 RS 232Auxiliary input 11 Control port wiring 234 Control ports 11 184 configuration 163 opto isolated inputs 163 relay outputs 163 wiring pin outs 234 Controls 13 Country settings 49 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Index Credit notices 231 Data bidire
234. operation and to prevent damage to equipment or personnel A Important Note Information you should know to connect and operate your codec successfully IP Information specific to IP connections ISDN Information specific to ISDN connections POTS Information specific to POTS connections Typographic Conventions e Codec software elements are in Arial bold e g Contacts e Codec hardware elements are in bold Capitals e g KEYPAD Help Button Press the Li information help button when navigating codec menus to display a dialog suggesting the actions which can be performed from within the current menu Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 3 Glossary of Terms AES EBU Digital audio standard used to carry digital audio signals between devices AES3 Official term for the audio standard referred to often as AES EBU BRI Basic Rate Interface for ISDN services DN O Directory Number for ISDN The Domain Name System DNS is used to assign domain names to IP addresses over the World Wide Web Domain A group of computers or devices on a network which are administered with common rules and procedures Devices sharing a common part of the IP address are said to be in the same domain The Differentiated Services Code Point is a field in an IP packet header for DSCP prioritizing data when traversing IP networks i Ee of switching to an alternative backup audio stream if the primary connection is lost
235. options which allow you to restore factory default settings within the codec See Reset and Restore Factory Defaults for more details on each option roa 1 Open the web GUI and click the Settings ae symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel 2 Click the Reset Restore button at the top of the Settings panel F r i t am et p pm t a oo p a ca ee Ta UG HS l Network Options Audio SIP Modules ISDN Answer Firmware Licensing Taiki r tal i i Tl oe P gr Br Ai mn B a E J N m ae er Oe F 7 i Fi e hr Ls ro z p ig a 3 Click one of the four reset options available Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 151 Network Options Audio SIP Firmware Licensing Reset Audio and Connect setings Restore Factory Defaults Clear Codec Log Delete Programs amp Call History Reboot Codec Backup C 4 A confirmation dialog appears for each option click Yes to proceed or No to cancel the reset function n r ETUR aa netrmro p i SUSSANA TONNS 20 17 Backup and Restore Functions The Toolbox web GUI can be used to backup and restore codec settings including e Programs containing a variety of connection settings e All system settings that have been adjusted to change the factory default codec settings current runtime settings Files can also be used to copy configurations onto othe
236. or not e The uplink bandwidth capability of your broadband connection A Important Notes Music and MusicPLUS algorithms cannot be used over SIP connections Use MP2 algorithms at 64kbps mono or 128kbps stereo for high quality connections when using SIP or use G 711 and G 722 if required Tieline G3 codecs do not support connections using AAC and will default to MPEG Layer 2 if an incoming connection is programmed to use this algorithm It can be a good idea to listen to the quality of your program signal using each algorithm and to see how it sounds when it is sent at different connection bit rates as well as different FEC and jitter buffer millisecond settings This will assist you to determine which is the best algorithm setting for the connection you are setting up Please see the following table for details on the connection requirements of the different algorithms available Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 174 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Algor IP bit rate IP over Audio Quality and ithm per channel head per Features connectio n Full bandw idth perfect audio quality for voice and music e No error concealment correction or artefacts Linear Uncom pressed 16 24 bit Oms up to 45kHz Tieline Music Up to 20ms 15kHz Up to 20ms 22kHz G 711 3kHz 1ms G 722 7kHz 1ms MPEG Layer 2 Upto 24 to 22kHz 36ms sample rate x 80kbps bits per sample x no channels
237. orrect the problem by one or more of the following measures 1 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver 2 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different to that used by the receiver 3 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician FCC Part 68 FCC Registration Number 6NAAUS 34641 MD E Ringer Equivalence Number REN 0 5B A label containing among other information the FCC registration and Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this equipment is prominently posted on the bottom near the rear of the equipment If requested this information must be provided to your telephone company USOC Jacks This device uses RJ11C terminal jacks The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to obtain the maximum RENs for the calling area lf this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of the service may be required If advance notice is not practical the company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a comp
238. orrupted over the network e Renegotiate connection bit rate downwards If link quality good add or increase FEC as required Assess ISPs QoS if very bad performance Once could be an anomaly assess lost amp late packets If many lost packets and network is unreliable renegotiate bit rate and or FEC down If many late packets increase jitter buffer Auto jitter buffer will adjust automatically For manual jitter buffer settings increase jitter buffer depth 50 100 ms amp reassess if only a few packets arrive late over time audio repairs will be automatic and may not require buffer changes Assess audio quality amp the number of FEC repairs if many packets are being lost perhaps reduce FEC amp or renegotiate bit rate down Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 55 18 3 Steps to Connect over ISDN The following procedure explains how to create a custom peer to peer program and dial another Tieline codec over ISDN using the front panel keypad and navgation buttons A Important Notes See Testing ISDN Connections for valuable information about setting up and maintaining reliable ISDN connections e See ISDN Module Configuration for details on module settings e See ISDN Answering Configuration for details on ISDN answering settings e See Configuring ISDN for details on configuring connections via a computer 1 Press and press and release the right gt arrow button to open t
239. ote Bidirectional auxiliary IP data is available on one audio stream when multicast dialing programs When auxiliary data is enabled on one stream the option is greyed out for other audio streams in the program wizard See RS232 Data Configuration for detailed information on RS232 data and see Enabling Relays and RS232 Data for more information on relay operations 6 Configure the multicast IP address and audio port the same multicast address and port must be used for both the server and client programs then specify which IP streaming interface is used to dial this connection e g Primary port ETH1 or Secondary port ETH2 then click Next Note By default Any will select ETH1 if it is available and ETH2 if it is unavailable 7 Click the drop down arrows on the right hand side of each text box to select the Encoding Sample rate Bit rate or Sample size options Click Next to continue Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 o Merlin User Manual v 1 4 F rs a ox a i a B a Pi oe ee i 8 Click to configure e Auto Jitter Adapt and the preferred auto jitter setting using the drop down arrow for Buffer Priority or e Fixed Buffer Level and enter the Jitter Depth which must be between 12ms and 5000ms depending on the algorithm you select Important Notes Automatic or fixed jitter buffer settings can be adjusted on individual client codecs as required There is no jitter buffer setting on the
240. pen Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper o Copyright c 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 Expat maintainers e libffi o Copyright c 1996 2011 Anthony Green Red Hat Inc and others e OpenssH o Portions of code under ISC style license to the copyright holders Internet Software Consortium Todd C Miller Reyk Floeter Chad Mynhier e popt o Copyright c 1998 Red Hat Software e vixie cron O Copyright 1988 1990 1993 by Paul Vixie All rights reserved o Copyright C 2004 2011 Internet Systems Consortium Inc ISC o Copyright C 1997 2000 by Internet Software Consortium Inc THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Open Source UCB License e util linux This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors Copyright c 1989 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS
241. phone service attached to one line sometimes called a Party Line As more lines are installed services are separated but the redundant cabling may remain connected across the line causing problems with the operation of your codec Leakage Problems on the Line A good line should have an earth isolation of better than ten mega ohms If your line is located in an area where water is a problem ask your Telco to check out the earth leakage Equipment Problems at the CO or Local Exchange Although there are many factors at the Telco end that can cause problems a problem that does occasionally occur is that the clock on the interface codec to your line is not synchronized to the network A drifting clock will cause instability and unreliable codec performance If you suspect that this could be the problem contact your local Telco POTS Exchange Problems On most good POTS lines Tieline codecs can achieve a 28 8kbps connection at a line quality of approximately 50 or greater If you are not able to achieve this level of operation you may have a problem with your line or the line at the other end of the connection Tips for Successful POTS Operation 1 Take a phone when you are doing a remote broadcast Connect it to the line you want to use and Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 221 dial the number to check for any unusual noises If present these may be caused by other devices connected to the line 2 Tak
242. pplied on the Auxiliary input this is disabled by default Configuring Input Channel Settings Renaming Input Channels 1 Click the Input Settings Ika symbol on the input channel you want to rename 2 Select Name and click in the text box to edit or enter a new name 3 Click Change Name to confirm the name change Selecting Analog and Digital Audio Sources Codec inputs are configured for analog high gain mic level audio sources by default 1 Click the Input Settings Ika symbol 2 Select Type and click to select either Analog or AES3 COES Gang with Ap E i ope GN Channel 7 Type gt Analog 3 When you select AES3 the display changes to reflect 100 input levels slider and input on off controls are locked on ll i Channel A Important Note Input levels can only be adjusted on analog inputs See Configuring AES3 Audio for more information about the digital inputs and outputs Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 106 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Ganging Channels Ganging is useful because it allows you to adjust the audio level of both inputs simultaneously 1 Click the Input Settings Ika symbol on either channel 2 Select Gang and click to either gang or ungang channels nS a q Name gt Cc Channel 2 Type b IGC b k Input AUX Input PHONE 3 When ganged the two channel sliders move in sync with each other when dragged using a mouse pointer Analog
243. r Using the web GUI 80 Web GUI alarms panel 80 compatibility 76 config Mono Stereo IFB Answer 133 config Mono Stereo IFB Dial 121 configure panel 80 configure peer to peer mono stereo 108 connecting over a LAN 76 dial an audio stream 147 dial multiple IP streams 147 disconnect an audio stream 147 disconnect individual IP stream 147 disconnect multiple IP streams 147 help panel 80 inputs panel 80 internet connections 76 LAN troubleshooting 76 master panel 80 242 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Web GUI PC LAN settings 76 port selection 76 prerequisites 76 programs panel 80 rules panel 80 Wiring DB15 control port in out 234 opto isolated inputs 234 relay closures 234 RS232 using DB9 234 _X XLR in out 11 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014
244. r similar codecs Programs are essentially connection profiles that may include e Program audio stream and connection names e IP address port algorithm jitter buffer FEC and bit rate settings etc for audio stream connections Creating Backup Files ra 1 Open the web GUI and click the Settings oa symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel 2 Click the Reset Restore button at the top of the Settings panel Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 152 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 aCe tne es 0 teil t i eni Network Options Audio SIP Modules ISDN Answer Firmware Licensing Backup Kesiore ON 4 Use your mouse pointer to click and select the check boxes to confirm your backup requirements then click Backup 5 Click Save and select a location on your PC to save the configuration file Restoring Configuration File Settings 1 Open the web GUI and click the Settings 1 symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel 2 Click the Reset Restore button at the top of the Settings panel Network Options Audio 4 Navigate to the configuration file on your PC that you want to load then click Open 5 Use your mouse pointer to click and select the check boxes for restoring items For example Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 153 you could select the Include programs check box and deselect the Include system check box if you
245. r which assists in identifying different ISDN services across the network Your Telco must provide a SPID for each B channel you order when connecting over US Nat or US AT amp T networks in the US A SPID is not required when using the AT amp T PTP protocol Typically each ISDN BRI service in the US will have two SPIDs and these must be entered correctly When you enter a SPID into your codec and connect it to an ISDN line an initialization and identification process takes place whereby the terminating equipment your codec sends the SPID to the switch The switch then associates the SPID with a specific Service Profile and directory number Note SPID numbers normally include the phone number and additional prefix or suffix digits up to 20 digits long Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 4 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 20 2 2 Configuring ISDN Answering ISDN Answer Configs are used to determine how codec ISDN modules will behave when answering ISDN calls The following image explains the difference between answering calls from Tieline codecs sending session data and non Tieline codecs making sessionless ISDN calls Codecs sending Tieline Session Data contain all the information required to connect e g algorithm and audio stream routing settings When answering sessionless calls it is necessary to configure the answering codec with an ISDN Answer Config which tells the answering codec how a sessionless call will try and connect
246. ram settings This panel displays the program wizard when creating a new program Click to delete the currently selected program Note Ensure the program is not loaded or the delete function will not work 7 Maximize Minimize Click to maximize a panel to view it in full screen mode or click to minimize back to the default panel size 8 Close button Click to close the Connect panel 6 Delete Program Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 s2 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Inputs Panel for Input Adjustments 000 9 ahs wee OE eee Ei Reference levels v s View local pm q p 4 AT a y p y z q a ON Channel 1 GM Channel 2 jon Channel 5 OFF Channel OFF Channel 5 OFF Channel 6 OFF AUX OFF PHONE AUX PHONE D Important Note Tieline codecs have different input configurations therefore the image shown may not reflect the number of inputs displayed in your codec web GUI Feature __ Descrip on _ _ O 1 Channel ON OFF Buttons Click to turn each channel ON or OFF 2 Reference levels menu Click the drop down arrow to select the codec input reference level default setting Auto 3 Lock Button Click to lock all Input panel settings greys out when locked 4 View local Click to view local codec inputs default 5 Settings button Click to adjust input Name Type IGC and Ganging 6 Maximize Minimize Click to maximize a panel to view it in full screen mode
247. raversing different networks Routers can also be programmed to ignore these forwarding priorities so they are not assured across all networks The codec can be programmed to tag IP data packets sent across a network by entering a value into the Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP field within the header of data packets transmitted over the network Check with your IT administrator before changing this setting By default the codec is programmed for Assured Forwarding and more details about DSCP are available on Wikipedia at http en wikipedia org wiki Dscp Configuring QoS 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Use the navigation buttons to select QoS and press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 188 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Contiqure 3 Press the button and use the RETURN button to delete numbers already entered then use the numeric KEYPAD to enter the new setting recommended by your IT administrator 4 Press the button to save the new seiting ci Important Note To ensure the continuous and regular flow of tagged data packets along the path from point to point all routers and switching equipment must respect the QoS setting of the packets sent Any bandwidth partitioning schemes should partition over a Small interval to ensure the codec jitter buffer does not empty and audio remains continuous 21 9 Reset and Restore Factory Default Settings There are several options in the Reset menu which allow you to restore fa
248. re all non SIP IP connections There are two very distinct parts to a call when dialing over IP The initial stage is the call setup stage and this is what SIP is used for The second stage is when data transference occurs and this is left to the other protocols used by a device i e using UDP to send audio data All the mandatory EBU N ACIP 3326 algorithms are supported G 711 G 722 MPEG 1 Layer 2 and 16 bit PCM as well as optional algorithms including LC AAC HE AAC and aptX Enhanced The default algorithm selected when connecting using SIP is G 711 ci Important Notes e Each codec should be registered to a different SIP server account to avoid connection conflicts e SIP dialing is only supported over point to point connections not multi unicast connections e Tieline G3 codecs do not support connections using AAC and will default to MPEG Layer 2 if an incoming call is programmed to use this algorithm e Failover and SmartStream PLUS redundant streaming are not available with SIP connections e When connecting to a Tieline G3 codec using SIP you need to manually select the G3 audio reference level in the codec To do this select SETTINGS gt Audio gt Ref Level gt Tieline G3 In addition select the following on the G3 codec prior to dialing Select either a mono or stereo profile Select Menu gt Configuration gt IP 1 Setup gt Session Type gt SIP Select Menu gt Configuration gt IP1 Setup gt Algo
249. re information OO O l O Important Note Firmware upgrade files are very large and it is usually much quicker to download the file to your PC first and then upgrade the codec manually using the Manual Firmware Upgrade procedure Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 168 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 21 21 1 Front Panel Configuration Tasks The following sections explain how to configure codec settings using the front panel LCD screen and KEYPAD Configuring IP via the Front Panel Checking IP Address Details in the Codec 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Select Unit and press the button 3 IP address details and other unit details are listed Use the arrow up and down W buttons to scroll and view all details listed Unit Detalls ETH1 IF 172 16 112 219 FTHi lpue fe0 0 0 0 201 cOTf fede Seb Re tho ETH1 Sub ci Important Note See the Configuring IP Connections sections for more details about IP connections For assistance with configuration of IPv4 or IPv6 network connections contact your IT Administrator Ethernet and VLAN Configuration Options The codec features two physical Ethernet port interfaces and up to four additional VLAN interfaces VLAN interfaces have features similar to physical Ethernet interfaces However your network administrator will need to configure VLAN support throughout your network for VLANs to be Supported in your codec As an example if only one physical Ethernet interface
250. rights reserved o 32 bit CRC compensation attack detector Copyright c 1998 CORE SDI S A Buenos Aires Argentina All rights reserved o ssh keyscan Copyright 1995 1996 by David Mazieres lt dm lcs mit edu gt o One component of OpenSSH source code Copyright c 1983 1990 1992 1993 1995 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved o Remaining components under 2 clause BSD clause 3 removed Copyright holders Markus Friedl Theo de Raadt Niels Provos Dug Song Aaron Campbell Damien Miller Kevin Steves Daniel Kouril Wesley Griffin Per Allansson Nils Nordman Simon Wilkinson o Parts of portable version under 2 clause BSD clause 3 removed Copyright holders Ben Lindstrom Tim Rice Andre Lucas Chris Adams Corinna Vinschen Cray Inc Denis Parker Gert Doering Jakob Schlyter Jason Downs Juha Yrj l Michael Stone Networks Associates Technology Inc Solar Designer Todd C Miller Wayne Schroeder William Jones Darren Tucker Sun Microsystems The SCO Group Daniel Walsh Red Hat Inc o Parts of openbsd compat Copyright holders Todd C Miller Theo de Raadt Damien Miller Eric P Allman The Regents of the University of California Constantin S Svintsoff e OpenSSL crypto blowfish crypto des o Copyright C 1995 1997 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com o Clause 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement Thi
251. ring Multicast Client Programs 1 Open the web GUI and click the Programs symbol at the top of the screen to display the Programs panel 2 Click the New Program button to open the wizard and e Click in the text box to name the new program e Select Multicast Client to configure a multicast program or if you want to use an existing program as a template select this option Then click Next a el NYC Studio 1 A Important Notes When you decide to use an existing program as a template the new program inherits all the settings of the template program and you can adjust these settings as required by continuing through the program wizard Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 139 3 Enter a name for the Audio Stream then click Next Pr aan Fa Diin 1 F _ j x b B f 4 5 i s a 5 5 i x k Fi gaan ar bariet ad 4 This audio stream connection in the wizard will allow the codec to dial Enter the name of the connection in the text box then click Next 5 Follow the instructions on the right hand side of the panel to configure the transport settings for the connection then click Next Note select UDP IP RTP for RFC compliant streaming i __________ a Fj a m mt 5 E tj Pe Er dabai S ee a a i m r j paT Important N
252. rithm gt G711 G722 or MP2 SIP Server Connections Getting Started Registering codecs for SIP connectivity is simple First choose the SIP server that you wish to register your codec with On a LAN this may be your own server or it could be one of the many internet servers available We recommend that you use your own SIP server and configure it to use G 711 G 722 MP2 and AAC algorithms This is because most internet SIP servers are for VoIP phones and are only configured for G 711 and GSM algorithms When you register an account with a SIP server you will be provided with e The SIP server IP address A username often the same as a SIP number A password Domain details Realm details Sometimes Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 o Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Program the Codec for SIP using the Web GUI Use the Toolbox web GUI to program SIP account registration details into your codec Once these details have been entered into the codec each time it is connected to a public IP address it will contact the SIP server automatically to acknowledge its presence over a wide area network 1 Connect your codec to a LAN connection with a public IP address then login to the Toolbox web GUI and click the Settings k bs symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel Click the SIP button in the top left corner of the System panel Enter the account details into the relevant text boxes Enter the Registration
253. rks the automatic jitter buffer generally works well It adapts automatically to the prevailing IP network conditions to provide continuity of audio streaming and minimizes delay A fixed jitter buffer is preferable over satellite connections to ensure continuity of signals CAUTION If a Tieline codec connects to a device that is using non compliant RTP streams then the last fixed setting programmed into the codec will be enabled default is 500ms Non compliant devices include some other brands of codec web streams and other devices Tieline Auto Jitter Buffer Settings Least Delay This setting attempts to reduce the jitter buffer to the lowest possible point while still trying to capture the majority of data packets and keep audio quality at a reasonable level This setting is the most aggressive in its adaptation to prevailing conditions so jitter buffer may vary more quickly than with the other settings It is not recommended in situations where jitter variation is significant and or peaky E g 3G multi user wireless networks It is best for stable and reliable links such as dedicated or lightly loaded WAN LANs Highest Quality This setting is the most conservative in terms of adapting down to reduce delay The jitter buffer setting will actually stay high for a longer period after a jitter spike is detected just in case there are more spikes to follow This setting is best used where audio quality is most highly desired and
254. rogram type cannot be unloaded by a codec dialing in with a different program type e Some drop down menus and settings may be greyed out intentionally depending on features available and the transport selected e g IP or ISDN e t is possible to save a program at several points throughout the program wizard and use default settings to save configuration time e Failover and SmartStream PLUS redundant streaming are not available with SIP or Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 122 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 sessionless IP connections e POTS is not supported for stereo audio stream connections e To learn more about programs see the section titled About Program Dialing 1 Open the web GUI and click the Programs symbol at the top of the screen to display the Programs panel 2 Click the New Program button to open the wizard and e Click in the text box to name the new program e Select Mono Stereo Peer to Peer IFB or if you want to use an existing program as a template select this option Then click Next Note The following example is configured to connect a stereo audio stream and mono IFB stream Program Summary studio 1 ae eee eee a ee S i D Important Note When you decide to use an existing program as a template the new program inherits all the settings of the template program and you can adjust these settings as required by continuing through the program wizard 3 Enter the Audio Stream name and conf
255. rst SIP call and a default peer to peer program will be loaded There is no Tieline session data transferred during SIP calls to assist with configuring the codec Disconnect D Important Notes e Remember to lock an answering program in a codec when answering multiple SIP calls e When multiple calls are answered by the codec they are routed to audio inputs and outputs on a first come first served basis e Ensure the appropriate UDP audio ports are open in your firewall to allow multiple SIP audio streams to connect See Installing the Codec at the Studio for more information e Failover and SmartStream PLUS redundant streaming are not available with SIP connections Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 147 20 13 Dial and Disconnect a Program Connecting a Program 1 Click to select the program you want to load from the Programs list in the Master panel Connections Programs Connect 2 Click Connect to load the program and connect all audio streams Disconnecting a Program 1 Click to highlight the audio stream in the Connections pane of the Master panel Connections Status Details Programs Disconnect A 2 Click Disconnect to end the connection 20 14 Dial Disconnect Multiple Audio Streams Load and Connect Multiple Audio Streams within a Program 1 Click to select the program you want to load from the Programs list Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 18 Merlin User
256. s ISDN audio stream are now complete Select POTS Codec in the Mode drop down menu to encode decode using POTS or select Analog Phone to configure a standard analog phone call then click Next a a ee Porscoosee lt lt Meine Codecs E Both ee eer h e mil m gr p p r ie F i P a ey oe he i z r n Saal a a ae i pr F i pi r ei F TS Tani 7 ign a m a F P i ian i ii 7 i i Next enter the phone number of the codec or device you want to dial When multiple POTS modules are installed click the Via drop down menu and select Module 1 or Module 2 to specify which POTS module will dial Next click Save Program to save Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 113 the program with default settings or click Next to specify algorithm settings and configure a backup connection if required recommended Dialing settings for this POTS audio stream are now complete Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 a Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Configuring a Merlin Backup Connection or Auto Reconnect At this point in the wizard you can choose to configure Auto Reconnect or create a backup connection for the audio stream you are configuring D Important Note When Auto Reconnect is enabled the dialing codec will continue to attempt a connection with the remote codec until Disconnect is pressed either on the dialing codec s keypad or in the web GUI 1 Click
257. s are installed in the codec Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 95 o cea Caig ma S E i m apf SISUS E _ _ _ l Network Options Audio SIP Modules Contig 2 Config 3 Config 4 Default Unbonded Only Important Note B channels can only be selected once and are greyed out once they have been selected in one of the four ISDN Configs Single B Channel Config To use a single 64kbps B channel for a connection e g a 1 x Mono Peer to Peer audio stream simply select a B channel from those available and click the Save settings button If only one B channel is selected then Unbonded Only is the default setting J 7 Config 2 m Config 3 j Config 4 1 peta Multiple B Channel Bonding Config A point to point audio stream can also bond multiple B channels to create higher bandwidth connections In the following example two B channels from Module 2 have been selected within Config 2 Note that B Channel 1 in Module 1 has already been selected in Config 1 and is therefore unavailable in Config 2 Contig 1 Configure the bonding setting that best suits the audio stream with which this Config will be associated Bonded or Unbonded is the best setting in most situations Note Click the Save settings button to apply changes to the Co
258. s not shared with other PCs or devices UDP is being used as the audio transport protocol No more than 80 of ISP connection bandwidth is being used 10 There are no wireless connections being used The ISP connection speed has been tested and is suitable 22 5 Testing IP Network Connections There are a few very simple tools that you can use to test whether a codec can be reached over an IP network e Visit http www speedtest net to test the upload and download speed of your IP connections and identify your public IP address e Visit www portforward com and download the port checking application to verify your router s ports are open Note Using a port scanner to test a codec will be unsuccessful if you try to scan and the port is already in use i e the codec is connected e Visit www subnetonline com and use an online port scanner to check for open and closed TCP ports This site also has numerous other software tools including an online ping webtool for IPv4 plus TraceRoute and TracePath software tools Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 201 Ping the Codec A ping test can be used to test whether it is possible to reach a codec or any device over an IP network A ping test measures e The round trip time of packets e Any packet loss There are two types of ping tests 1 Short test sends 4 packets and delivers statistics i Point to the start menu on your PC and click once ii In the search t
259. s product includes software developed by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com e strace o Copyright c 1991 1992 Paul Kranenburg lt pk cs few eur nl gt o Copyright c 1993 Branko Lankester lt branko hacktic nl gt o Copyright c 1993 Ulrich Pegelow lt pegelow moorea uni muenster de gt o Copyright c 1995 1996 Michael Elizabeth Chastain lt mec duracef shout net gt o Copyright c 1993 1994 1995 1996 Rick Sladkey lt jrs world std com gt o Copyright C 1998 2001 Wichert Akkerman lt wakkerma deephackmode org gt o All rights reserved e util linux text utils o Copyright c 2000 2001 Gunnar Ritter All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 226 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the lt ORGANIZATION gt nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND
260. sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensaeeseesesaeeseeonsneaeeneeesneaes 143 12 Multiple Peer to Peer SIP Programs cccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeaeeseesesaeeseeonsneaeeeeesesnsaes 146 13 Dialand DISCONNECH a PrOGKAM sciccicccccewencssccecectasctieesiecciareceesacshasaseeadecstvetesetiemeseseiesocens 147 14 Dial Disconnect Multiple Audio StreaMs cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeonseseeonsesons 147 15 View Edit Delete Program cccccsescecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeecececeoeoeseeesueusuensaaeanananans 149 16 Reset Factory Default Settings cccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeensesoesnseeeneesonsesonseseensenons 150 If Backup and R store FUNCIONS irran nate he ewe tence aden reac adtanteoaers 151 18 LOCK OPURIOCK Programs isicieicoh ives crenetcwnies ede cetemecceteteetiore E a EEEE 153 19 Contiguring IP Packet QOS scorende ee a iaa 154 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 4 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 20 21 22 23 24 25 Part XXI O ON OO OF FP WD N _h 11 Part XXII O O NO OO FPF W N h l l N 13 Part XXIII Part XXIV Configuring SNMP in the Codec s asnnnunnnnunnnnnunnnnnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 155 DOW NOAA LOGS esiis naa A a aS REE ENAN 156 Conngurmg Alarm S rreran a EA n iA 157 RS232 Data Configura tlon scesero aar iaa Eae E aa KA a Aae aS 162 Creating RUIG Sirisiri E ar a 163 Upgrading Codec Firmware s sena aa a a a aE 167 Fron
261. sceseeeeseseeeeenees 202 Using Answer Routes for Sessionless ISDN Calls cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeees 216 POTS Connection Tips amp Precautions cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesenseseeseseeeneessneeseseneeeones 219 Merlin Compliances and Certifications cccsccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseseeeeseeeneesenseeeeeneeeones 221 FCC Compliance Statements sviss aaa aaa 221 SOMW ale LICENCES onsin nin aa a G 223 Trademarks and Credit Notices assnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmn 231 Merlin Specifications 232 Appendix A RS232 and Control Port Wiring 234 Index 236 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 5 1 Warnings amp Safety Information A 1 Both appliance power cables must be removed from the device for Power Disconnection 2 Remove the phone cable from the POTS interface before servicing THUNDERSTORM AND LIGHTNING WARNING DO NOT USE Tieline codecs during thunderstorms and lightning You may suffer an injury using a phone Tieline codec or any device connected to a phone during a thunderstorm This can lead to personal injury and in extreme cases may be fatal Protective devices can be fitted to the line however due to the extremely high voltages and energy levels involved in lightning strikes these devices may not offer protection to the users or the Tieline codec and equipment connected to the codec Secondary strikes can occur
262. screen 2 Use the navigation buttons to select Programs and press the button 3 Use the up and down Ww navigation buttons to select the program you want to use then press the CONNECT button to load the program and make a connection 4 The Wait Connecting screen appears during the connection process and then connection details are displayed 18 8 Disconnecting a Connection 1 Press the red DISCONNECT button on the numeric KEYPAD at any time to hangup a connection 2 Use the right gt navigation button to select Yes and press the DISCONNECT button or the button to confirm the disconnection amina Hangup all connections Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 62 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 18 9 Redialing a Connection Press the CONNECT button from any codec menu to redial previous connections except menus accessed wa the Connect gt IP ISDN or POTS screens Manually dialed connections are saved as programs retaining all the dialing and configuration information programmed into the codec A program is identified in the Recent Programs redial screen using either a previously entered name or by a dialing address or number manually dialed connections 18 10 Configuring Auto Reconnect Auto Reconnect is disabled by default When enabled the dialing codec attempts to reconnect if audio is temporarily lost over a connection Important Note When Auto Reconnect is enabled the dialing codec will continue to attempt a conne
263. sent by the local codec i e being downloaded by the remote codec To ensure a stable connection try to maintain a reliable reading of 80 or higher for both the Send and Return LQ reading Important Note The Return link quality reading is the same as the Local L setting displayed on a G3 codec Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 53 e The Send link quality reading is the same as the Remote R setting displayed on a G3 codec Viewing Connection Statistics Navigate to Status in the Connected IP screen and press the button to display the Cxn Stats connection statistics screen This displays the performance of the codec in sending IP audio packets across the network Analysis is historic and assessed over 60 seconds and 10 minutes of connection time 0 O O On 00 09 eat aera Description se Feature Description 4 1 Lost Packets Packets Packets sent that failed to arrive sent that failed to Packets sent that failed to arrive LEL apy UE Indicates how often the jitter buffer reservoir empties causing loss of Buffer audio E Late Packets Packets The number of packets that arrive late i e after audio play out number of The number of packets that arrive late i e after audio play out that arrive late i e after audio play out CE Packets Indicates the number of forward error correction FEC packets that have been sent if it is enabled in the codec 4 1 minute
264. server codec because it never receives audio packets 9 Select the Enable File Playback on silence detection check box to configure the codec to play back audio from a file via a drive attached to the USB port 10 Click Save Program to complete configuration of the program 11 Configure multicast server and multicast client programs and load all codecs with the appropriate program Select and connect audio streams in a program using the Master panel or dial the program manually using the codec front panel Dial the multicast server program connection first and then connect multicast client codec programs to begin receiving multicast audio packets Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 tat 20 10 Configure SIP Settings The codec is fully EBU N ACIP Tech 3326 compliant when connecting using SIP Session Initiation Protocol to other brands of IP codecs About SIP SIP provides superior interoperability between different brands of codecs due to its standardized protocols for connecting devices and is intended to be used when connecting Tieline codecs to non Tieline devices Devices primarily use SIP to dial another device s SIP address and find its location with a minimum of fuss This task is usually performed by SIP servers which communicate between SIP compliant devices to set up a call When connecting two devices SDP performs similar tasks to Tieline s proprietary session data which is used to configu
265. sh steadily if you are connected to an active LAN connection e The Genie and Merlin families of IP codecs support two simultaneous Ethernet connections 3 If you are connecting a single codec to a router without a firewall you can enter the public IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway directly into the codec and your work is done Note your Telco should be able to provide this information 4 Alternatively if you are connected to a router with a firewall configure Network Address Translation NAT in your router NAT is performed between the public internet and your private Local Area Network LAN by your router Your remote codec sends IP data packets to the studio router s public static IP address and the router performs NAT which forwards these data packets to the private IP address allocated by the router to your codec As part of this process we recommended you e Connect to your router using a web browser e Configure it to allocate a static private IP address for each codec ci Important Note The IP address may change if the codec is allocated a DHCP IP address by the router and it loses power or is temporarily disconnected from the LAN This will cause problems for remote codecs attempting to dial and connect 5 Ensure your router s firewall is configured with the relevant TCP and UDP IP ports open to allow data traffic between your codec and the remote codec The process is fairly simple if you use the following procedure
266. should always use the second directory number and then it will always be routed via Route 2 to the Answering Audio Stream Connection configured with Answer Route 2 22 9 POTS Connection Tips amp Precautions POTS Operation Precautions POTS performance is greatly affected by the quality of the line being used Precautions must be taken to ensure the Tieline codec is not sharing the line with other devices Please remove these possible sources of interference DSL or ADSL Modems Other telephone handsets Portable phone base stations Unused parallel phone sockets Fax machines Computer modems Burglar alarm systems Extension bells Call waiting Call Waiting Call waiting tones may cause the codec to malfunction Most phone companies supply call waiting as a feature and you will need to turn it off Your Telco should be able to provide a number you can dial to disabling the call waiting feature on the line Private Branch Exchanges Avoid connecting the codec to a digital PBX or PABX system key station business system or Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 220 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 any other local switchboard It may sometimes be tricky to detect if you are connected to one of these systems however as a general guide these devices require you to dial an additional digit to access the POTS network WARNING Many of these systems are digital and have non standard telephone line A operating voltages If you attach your POTS modul
267. ss the button Reset iSOh AnSWer Reset iSOh Answer Setup Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 40 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 13 About POTS Modules The Tieline POTS G5 module can be used in the codec to stream high quality audio over a POTS PSTN phone line The codec has two module slots available and it is possible to insert one or two POTS G5 modules or a mix of POTS G5 and ISDN G5 modules as required The Tieline Music algorithm can deliver 15 kHz quality bi directional audio at bit rates as low as 24kbps over a POTS connection Modem Negotiation and Line Quality The codec can send and receive high speed digital information over a standard POTS telephone line via the modem in the POTS G5 module When connecting the local and remote codec POTS modems communicate over the phone line to establish the most reliable bit rate based on the prevailing line quality G5 POTS modems initially attempt to establish a link at the default bit rate of 28 8kbps and then perform a process called training during which the codecs at each end of the link analyze the line The codecs will then renegotiate the link downwards to the highest possible bit rate where line quality is greater than 70 Negotiation is the process of bit rate adjustment The POTS G5 module contains a SmartDAA Smart Data Access Arrangement line interface which isolates the modem from voltages on phone lines It is important to select the correct country
268. ssible bit rate to suit the prevailing line quality at each end of the link This process of training analyzes the line and compensates for frequency and phase response and cancels out any echo that may be present The codec will then renegotiate the link downwards to the highest possible bit rate where line quality is greater than 70 Negotiation is the process of bit rate adjustment Dialing Method Dialing only Click the drop down arrow for Dialing Method to select Tone DTMF or Pulse dialing over POTS Codec connections Tone dialing is used always when the Answer Mode is Analog Phone Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 tor Dial Tone Detect Dialing only Click the drop down arrow for Dial Tone detect to select either e Dial Tone Detect The module will only be allowed to dial when a dial tone is present on the line e Blind Dialing Allows the module to dial when no dial tone is present Monitor Modem Tone Dialing and Answering Click the drop down arrow for Monitor Modem Tone to select either Enabled or Disabled When enabled the module will allow audio monitoring of modem tones during connection in POTS Codec mode via the phone input By default the following phone input monitoring rules apply when multiple POTS G5 modules are installed in a codec and multiple POTS connections are dialed Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 102 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 20 3 2
269. supplementary ground terminal is provided on the codec to connect the unit to a ground connection The ground terminal has an M4 stud with M4 retaining nuts and is compatible with all grounding wires Remove only NUT 2 to connect your ground wire The ground wire must have a suitable lug When refitting NUT 2 ensure that both NUT 1 amp NUT 2 are correctly tightened to establish and maintain a proper earth connection Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 6 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 eee a G7 NIN 7 E ee A JA zz po 4 Z p pie m ae O DIL S M4 Nut 2 C AEA REMOVE and REFIT M4 Nut 1 EA NA once External Earth has amp Star Washer D been fitted DO NOT REMOVE External Earth External Earth from Customer M4 Stud Lug must suit M4 Stud Disclaimer Whilst every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this manual we are not responsible for any errors or omissions within it The product specifications and descriptions within this manual will be subject to improvements and modifications over time without notice as changes to software and hardware are implemented 2 How to Use the Documentation Manual Conventions Warnings Instructions that if ignored could result in death or serious personal injury caused by dangerous voltages or incorrect operation of the equipment These must be observed for safe operation Cautions Instructions warning against potential hazards or to detail practices that must be observed for safe
270. t Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ot channel of the headphone output For more details see the Monitor Modem Tones section in POTS Module Settings Monitoring POTS Calls when Connected 1 The CONNECTED LED on the front of the codec illuminates solid green when connected 2 The newly connected audio stream connection becomes visible in the Cxns menu via the Home screen To view connection details a Use the down Ww navigation button to select Cxns and press the button b When multiple audio streams are connected navigate to the one you want to view and press the button to vew connection details Connected POTS OO 14 52 hodule Mode POTS Codec 92498782 Lo Local 94 Remote 95 Ce Jmsic hono 26 4kbps The Local and Remote line quality displayed for POTS Codec connections is related to the actual POTS line quality at either end of the link This reading affects the maximum allowable bit rate when the codec is training and negotiating a connection It also indicates the stability of the connection when a call has been connected for a long period of time If the line quality starts drop quite low after being connected for a long period we recommend you retrain the connection to improve the line quality and avoid loss of audio 18 7 Load and Dial Custom Programs Custom programs stored on the codec are simple to load and dial from the codec front panel 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home
271. t e f you are using a DSL or ADSL connection make sure you purchase a high quality modem that can easily meet your speed requirements This is especially important if you are over 4 kms from an exchange e f you have multiple codecs connected to a local area network LAN please ensure that your network infrastructure is designed for media streaming and not domestic usage Tieline has tested several cheap 8 port switches that lose more packets between local computers than an international IP connection between Australia and the USA e f using a wireless connection ensure that the antenna signal strength received is strong The type of antenna used and the amount of output gain also affects connection quality G Important Note You should be able to stream audio between two codecs on your LAN and get high percentage send return link quality readings of around 99 If you see anything less than this then you should get a network engineer to investigate the issue 6 Once your internet connection is installed at the studio check that the connection performance is approximately what you ordered and are paying for A connection can perform below advertised bit rates if There is an error in ISP configuration There is an error in modem configuration There is a poor quality line between the studio and the exchange There are too may phones or faxes connected to the phone line or Line filters have been connected incorrectly
272. t c 2007 2010 Google Inc All rights reserved e libuuid o Copyright c 1996 1997 1998 1999 2007 Theodore Ts o e lighttpd o Copyright c 2004 Jan Kneschke incremental All rights reserved e net snmp o Copyright 1989 1991 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University All rights reserved o Derivative Work 1996 1998 2000 o Copyright 1996 1998 2000 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved o Copyright c 2001 2003 Networks Associates Technology Inc All rights reserved o Portions of this code are copyright c 2001 2003 Cambridge Broadband Ltd All rights reserved o Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems Inc 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara California 95054 U S A All rights reserved Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 225 o Copyright c 2003 2010 Sparta Inc All rights reserved o Copyright c 2004 Cisco Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications All rights reserved o Copyright c Fabasoft R amp D Software GmbH amp Co KG 2003 oss fabasoft com Author Bernhard Penz lt bernhard penz fabasoft com gt o Copyright c 2007 Apple Inc All rights reserved o Copyright c 2009 ScienceLogic LLC All rights reserved e openrc 2 clause BSD license clause 3 removed o Copyright c 2007 2009 Roy Marples lt roy marples name gt e OpenSSH o Copyright c 1995 Tatu Ylonen lt ylo cs hut fi gt Espoo Finland All
273. t 1 on the codec and a codec dialing in using IP2 will be routed to output 2 Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 121 20 7 Configure Mono or Stereo IFB Dialing Programs This program is designed to allow remote Merlin and Merlin PLUS codecs to dial a Merlin or Merlin PLUS codec at the studio and transmit 1 A bidirectional mono or stereo audio stream connection 2 A separate bidirectional mono IFB audio stream for communications This program can also include SmartStream PLUS dual IP streaming The following diagram indicates the default input output and port assignments for Mono or Stereo Peer to Peer IFB Programs using SmartStream PLUS and dialing a Merlin PLUS codec at the studio Default Studio Input Output and Audio Port Assignments for Remote Codec Input Output and Audio Port 2 x Stereo IFB Remotes with SmartStream PLUS Assignments with SmartStream PLUS nput Output UDP Audio UDP Audio Input Outpu UDP Audio UDP Audio 1 amp 2 Port 9001 Port 9001 redundant remote audio 1 7 P nput Outpu UDP Audio UDP Audio E nee oe Mono we nput Output UDP Audio UDP Audio 5 Port 9011 Port 9011 Bidirectional stereo remote audio 1 Bidirectional stereo remote audio 1 SmartStream PLUS redundant remote audio 1 SmartStream PLUS nput Outpu 1 amp 2 Merlin at Remote Site 1 Bidirectional Mono IFB 1 SmartStream PLUS redundant Mono IFB 2 SmartStream PLUS redundant M
274. t Panel Configuration Tasks 168 Configuring IP via the Front Panel csccccesssceeseeeeeenensenenseeenseeoneesnensensnsensesnsensaees 168 Selecting an AIG OF CIN irera a a aa REA a e E 171 Configuring the Jitter BURGE asirip a EE ES EES EEEE AA 178 Configuring Forward Error Correction ssssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 182 Configuring Encode Decode Direction ccsceccscceeeeeeceeeeceeeseeeneeeeneeeenseeceseseesnseeeesnees 184 Enabling Relays amp R9232 Data i aaa a a a a a aaa 184 Configuring TCP UDP POTIS esiri a a e a a a a Ea ra 185 Configuring QOS f r IP Packets issii e O a AAE EAEE Ni 187 Reset and Restore Factory Default Settings cccccecseeeee cece eee eeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 188 Configuring SNMP SeOtunGS Jeccetciccsssccoeccewetecriincsececen r aaa aiia 189 TES MOQO tactics ctevectolsi ciate ocak Glued ola tiwan cet enialetolati A ee Ghee 189 Reference 190 RE QUIAF MaAINICNANCC sissies a aa E a aE Eara 190 Installing the Codec at the Studio cccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeenseeonseseenseeneeeoneeeeeeneeeones 191 Understanding IP N UW OMKS reoi a a a S a aa 197 Tips for Creating Reliable IP Connections ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneesenseenseseensesons 199 Testing IP Network Connections sisina aa aaraa iaaa 200 Testing ISDN Connections siinsisis E a Ea ets 202 Connecting Tieline ISDN to other Codecs ccsceseeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeneeeense
275. t RH lt 70 0 to 35 C 32 F to 95 F non condensing Range Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 234 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 24 Appendix A RS232 and Control Port Wiring Relays The codec uses a DB15 connector to facilitate use of four CMOS solid state relays for the control of equipment consisting of four relay closures and four opto isolated outputs Inputs The input signal is referenced to chassis ground i e the ground reference terminal on the connector is connected the chassis The input device is a high impedance CMOS device with a 330 ohm pull up resistor to 5 volts Operation is as simple as joining the input pin to the ground terminal This can be via a remote relay contact or the open circuit collector of a transistor or FET DO NOT feed voltages into the inputs Outputs CMOS field effect transistors switch a low impedance path between the two pins when activated These are opto isolated and floating above ground It is important to current limit the source as damage will result where the current exceeds 100mA peak to peak No more than 48 volts peak to peak should be used as a safety precaution The resistance of the CMOS element is approximately 25 ohms in the ON state Control Port Pin outs A closing contact across Inputs 1 4 to Ground will provide a closing contact on the remote codec Outputs 1 to 4 If your codec supports multi unicast connections to multiple codecs a contact closure will appear on each of the
276. t is a one way broadcast from a remote site i e you are not using the return path from the studio or only using it for communications purposes it is possible to reduce or turn off FEC at the studio codec This effectively reduces the bandwidth required over the return link communications channel and increases the overall bandwidth available for the incoming broadcast signal from the remote site Configuring Encode Decode Direction By default the codec by is configured to both encode and decode data However it is possible to configure the codec to either encode or decode audio data only This is useful for e Conserving connection bandwidth when unidirectional data streaming is required e Lowering data costs e Increasing overall connection reliability Program the transmitting codec to encode only and program the receive codec to decode only when using this feature To adjust this setting Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select Connect and press the button Select IP and press or Select your preferred IP Session mode and press the button Use the down W navigation button to select Setup and press for Navigate to Dir and press or Select Encode Only or Decode Only and press or N OO Of W N Enabling Relays amp RS232 Data Data must be enabled to activate contact CONTROL PORT closure operation and RS232 data Please see Appendix A for RS
277. ta The jitter buffer depth on the receive codec needs to be increased if forward error correction is employed We recommend you add 100ms to the jitter buffer on a codec receiving FEC at a setting of 20 and 20ms at a setting of 100 Tieline s auto jitter buffer detects the amount of FEC that is being used and automatically compensates to increase the codec jitter buffer if FEC is being used Fixing Jitter Buffer Settings The default jitter buffer setting in Tieline codecs is 500 milliseconds This is a very reliable setting that will work for just about all connections However this is quite a long delay and we recommend that when you set up an IP connection you test how low you can set the jitter buffer in your codec Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen Use the navigation buttons on the front panel to select Connect and press the button Select IP and press the button Select your preferred IP Session mode and press the button Use the down W navigation button to select Setup and press the button Navigate to Jitter Buffer and press or Select Fixed Buffer Level and press or Use the numeric KEYPAD to enter the fixed buffer value in milliseconds and press or CO NOOO fF W N If you change the jitter buffer setting in a codec it will only adjust to the new level when link quality is high e g above 70 This is done to ensure audio quality is not compromised When manually programming the j
278. tails Auto Address Assignment By default the codec is programmed for connecting to an IPv6 router which automatically allocates IPv6 address details as displayed in the following example Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ot Manual IPv6 Address Assignment To configure IPv6 address details into the codec manually select Manual and enter details into the Address Prefix and Gateway text boxes Click Save Settings to store all configuration settings Specifying DNS Settings It is possible to specify Domain Name Server DNS settings to allow easy look up of codecs within the specified DNS Addresses or Domains Save Setings Configure QoS 1 Open the web GUI and click the Settings symbol at the top of the screen to display the Settings panel 2 Click the Options button 3 Click in the DSCP field and enter the priority setting recommended by your IT administrator 4 Click Save settings 20 2 Configuring ISDN Two slots are available for inserting optional ISDN modules into the codec These can be configured using the codec front panel or the Toolbox graphical user interface GUI See About ISDN Modules for additional information on ISDN You can use the web GUI to configure a dial and or answer program with ISDN settings You may also need to 1 Configure ISDN module settings 2 Configure ISDN Answering settings Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 92 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 20
279. td 2014 6s Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ci Important Note At this point you can navigate to Save on the Connect IP screen and 7 press to save the settings as a custom program for subsequent recall and dialing Use the numeric KEYPAD to give the program a name and press to save the program A confirmation message is displayed after the program is saved ConnectiP i hicast Ei Connecting a Multicast Client Program 1 After you have created multicast server and client programs on your codecs you can dial multicast connections First select the multicast server program you want to use on the server codec and dial to connect Select and load the multicast client program on each of the multicast client codecs and dial the multicast IP address to begin receiving multicast audio packets a Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen b Use the navigation buttons to select Programs and press the button c Use the up Aw and down Ww navigation buttons to select the multicast client program you want to connect with then press the button to load the program d Press the CONNECT button to make a connection You can navigate to Cxns on the Home screen to view a codec s connection Status then press to vew connection statistics for IP packets being received over the connection 18 16 Deleting Programs 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen 2 Use the navigation buttons to select Programs and press the
280. te select 32kHz or 48kHz sample rate for MP2 depending on available B channels 4 Navigate to a Destination e g Dest 1 or Dest 2 and press the button to select each one in turn Enter the number for each B channel you want to dial and press the button then select which B channel will dial using that number and press the button 5 Navigate down to Auto Reconnect and press the button to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Note This is normally enabled on the dialing codec only ISOM Dial Setuo Press OK to edit Auto Reconr Save as Program 6 Navigate down to Save as Program and press the button to save these settings as a program 7 Navigate down to Module Configuration and press the button ISOM Dial Setup hodule Configurator 8 Select the ISDN module you want to configure and press the button Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 29 tdodule Setinas hiodulei SOM ST Sync Module SomM sT Ssenc 9 Configure the following settings e Accept gt Voice and Data e Network gt Check with your Telco EU ETSI in Australia Europe amp most countries outside North America US Nat is the most common in the US but check with your Telco e Line Type gt Check with your Telco and select either Point to Multi point to multipoint or Point to Point point to point e DN MSN gt Enter the SPID and DN numbers if required in your region e g a SPID is normally required
281. te codec When Tieline Codecs is the Session Protocol selected using Tieline session data the Return Audio Port is automatically configured as UDP audio port 9000 by default for the first audio stream connection Click to deselect the Any check box to adjust this setting A codec dialing this connection and using the port specified will always be routed to output 1 on the codec receiving the call Click to configure e Auto Jitter Adapt and the preferred auto jitter setting using the drop down arrow for Buffer Priority or e Fixed Buffer Level and enter the Jitter Depth which must be between 12ms and 5000ms depending on the algorithm you select e Local and Remote FEC settings if required Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 ono ispn ISDN module answering settings are used if you select ISDN as the connection transport For more details see Configuring ISDN Answering POTS module answering settings are used if you select POTS as the connection transport For more details see Configuring POTS Answering 5 Enter a name for the second Audio Stream and select Answer only Then click Next Program Summary Tz Audio Stream 1 Program Summary Audio Stream 2 7 Configure the transport settings For IP click the drop down Session Protocol menu and select Tieline Codecs and ensure the Any check box is not selected then click Next
282. tes 1 amp 2 sent Audo Tieline Session Data Sveen 3 allows deterministic dialing and routing of ISDN calls 6 9 the codec sends info about the algorithm and o Stream 1 Anower Route 1 Remote Merlin Codec 2 with ISON Session Data Enabled ioga Asso Answering codec routes aa Dials ISDN Module 1 B syeam where to route the Auto ISDN audio stream using Sr wml j il Channel 2 when required PP steal A incoming call at the Prevesd A Tieline Program s Answer ag Mise Soom 2 Nann Roat using Dial Route 2 answering codec Route settings e g 1 amp 2 Non Tieline ISDN Codec 1 auso ISDN Module Answer Configs No Session Data Sent Aa Dials ISON Module 1 8 4 Steant 1820n oes codec are ag 22 Channel 1 when required lt Sessionless ISDN cal lt using Dial Route 1 by remote codec priat settings which Non Tieline ISON Codec 2 Ja na aae match the dialing codecs No Session Data Sent _ Ado Dials ISDN Module B Bai jo menage ado e ISON Answer Config 1 a Channel 2 when required lt 4 incoming call hear poral sts pos as using Dial Route 2 Aaa RAA Audio Stream 1 ISDN Module 1 B Channel 1 Audio Stream 2 ISDN Module 1 B Channel 2 Remote Merlin Codec 3 with ISON r Audio Stream 3 ISDN Module 2 B Channel 1 Session Data Enabled N gt O Audio Stream 4 ISDN Module 2 B Channel 1 n m Dials ISDN Module 2 B Pc efs Tieline Session Data Sevan 3 Manades chal and Au
283. the codec or the wrong algorithm could be selected Use the arrow buttons to navgate to Bitrate and check that it displays 64kbps this is a per channel rate so both ISDN channels are programmed Use the arrow buttons to navigate to Sample and check that the sample rate is set at 48kHz Press the SEL button and use the arrow buttons to make any adjustments to the current setting Press the Tel button below the codec LCD screen and press it again to display the SPID and DN MSN screen If these numbers need to be entered check with your Telco use the arrow buttons to navigate to each SPID and DN MSN field in turn and when it is highlighted press the SEL button and enter the number using the keypad Press SEL again to store each number once it has been entered Press the Tel button if you are not entering these SPID DN MSN numbers or if you have already entered them and check the local ISDN switch type setting is configured for your region 10 Press the SEL button and use the arrow buttons to adjust the setting Select ETS300 if you are connecting to a Euro ISDN servce Natl 1 is the most common in the US but check with your Telco 11 Press the SEL button to store the ISDN switch type setting that you have selected Your codec should now be configured Press the Tel button on the front panel until it displays the ISDN Status screen Ready should be displayed next to any active lines
284. thernet SmartStream IP streaming in case one IP connection fails Alternatively click Next to configure Auto Reconnect or a backup connection whereby the alternative connection is dialed if the primary connection fails By default primary IP streaming is va ETH1 To achieve the maximum level of redundancy select Secondary to configure redundant streaming from the secondary IP port ETH2 The redundant stream uses Send Audio Port 9001 by default and the Return Audio Port allocated is Automatic Note Automatic indicates that the codec will arbitrarily allocate the return port value and send this information to the codec to which you are dialing 203 36 205 163 a Automatic D Important Note Dual SmartStream PLUS redundant streaming over both Ethernet ports gt mitigates lost packets on either link and will provide IP network backup if an IP link is lost To learn more about SmartStream PLUS redundant IP streaming see http www tieline com Transports SmartStream I IP ispn For ISDN connections enter a number and select which B channel to use Select the lt lt Enable bonded connections check box to configure and bond multiple B channels Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 112 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Next click Save Program to save the program with default algorithm settings or click Next to specify a different algorithm and configure a backup connection if required recommended Dialing settings for thi
285. thms 4 Navigate to a Destination e g Dest 1 or Dest 2 and press the button to select each one in turn Enter the number for each B channel you want to dial and press the button then select which B channel will dial using that number and press the button 5 Navigate down to Auto Reconnect and press the button to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Note This is normally enabled on the dialing codec only ISON Dial Setup Press OK to edit T Save as Program 6 Navigate down to Save as Program and press the button to save these settings as a program 7 Navigate down to Module Configuration and press the button ISOM Dial Setuo todule Configuration 8 Select the ISDN module you want to configure and press the button tdodule Settinas hiodule 1 ISDN 5T Sync Module2 i5SDN 5T iSync Important Note ISDN Sync should be displayed when an ISDN line is connected to the codec This appears regardless of whether you have configured the ISDN Line Type correctly 9 Configure the following settings e Accept gt Voice and Data e Network gt Check with your Telco EU ETSI in Australia Europe amp most countries outside North America US Nat is the most common in the US but check with your Telco e Line Type gt Check with your Telco and select either Point to Multi point to multipoint or Point to Point point to point e DN MSN gt Enter the SPID and DN numbers if required in your re
286. ting of audio streams Use of Dial and Answer Routes is not recommended over IP See Configuring ISDN Answering or Configuring POTS Answering for more information Use the default settings for IP connections 4 This audio stream connection in the wizard will allow the codec to dial Enter the name of the connection in the text box then click Next Program Summary 5 Follow the instructions on the right hand side of the panel to configure the transport settings for the connection then click Next Program Summary Important Note e f you select Sessionless as the Session Protocol select UDP IP RTP for RFC compliant IP streaming e See RS232 Data Configuration for detailed information on RS232 data and see Enabling Relays and RS232 Data for more information on relay operations Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 no Merlin User Manual v 1 4 6 Configure destination codec dialing and encoding settings tp For IP connections configure the IP address ports and then specify which streaming interface is used to dial this connection e g Primary port ETH1 or Secondary port ETH2 Note By default Any will select ETH1 if it is available and ETH2 if it is unavailable T Important Note The Send Audio Port is the codec port at the remote end of the link to which you are sending audio The Return Audio Port is used by the local codec to receive audio from the remote codec When Tieline C
287. tion Then click Next symbol at the top of the screen to display am x T ee ee y to Program Summary Create a New Pro y i gt i k ied 3 Enter a name for the Audio Stream and select Answer only Then click Next Note if the codec you are configuring needs to dial connections as well as answer you can select Dial or answer and configure both dialing and answering connections For the purposes of this example dialing is excluded Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 ons Merlin User Manual v 1 4 reams 2 Program Summary E i P Ea f ae a ai pe pe Oe 7 n pa et ge Ng el It is also possible to select an Answer Route if required When routing multiple audio streams over transports like ISDN or POTS you can use Dial and Answer Routes to configure deterministic routing of audio streams Use of Dial and Answer Routes is not recommended over IP See Configuring ISDN Answering or Configuring POTS Answering for more information Use the default settings for IP connections 4 Enter the name of the connection in the text box then click Next DF J a a AAFS H waji di NS Program Summary 5 Configure the transport settings For IP click the drop down Session Protocol menu and select Tieline Codecs and ensure the Any check box is not selected then click Next i T Important Note The Return Audio Port is used by the local codec to feceive audio from the remo
288. tions to deliver very low delay audio for IP broadcasts and is ideal for high quality studio to transmitter links and audio distribution It delivers outstanding audio quality with exceptionally low delay across a range of IP networks 32kHz or 48kHz sample rates are available at either 16 bit or 24 bits per sample aptX Enhanced has a minimum connection bit rate of 128kbps per channel and offers 10Hz to 24kHz frequency response 24 bit 48kHz aptX Enhanced at the maximum bit rate of 576kbps delivers gt 120dB of dynamic range aptX Enhanced is supported over ISDN at the following sample and bit rates aptX Enhanced Mono 16 bit 32 kHz 128 kbps aptX Enhanced Mono 16 bit 48 kHz 192 kbps aptX Enhanced Mono 24 bit 32 kHz 192 kbps aptX Enhanced Stereo 16 bit 32 kHz 256 kbps oe N Overview of Opus Algorithm Opus is a highly versatile open source audio coding algorithm It incorporates technology from the well known SILK and CELT codecs to create a low latency speech and audio codec It is a variable bit rate algorithm ideal for live broadcast situations because of its capacity to deliver high quality real time Audio over IP AolP at low bit rates Visit http www opus codec org for more info There are three Opus algorithm configurations available Algorithm Recommended connection for on air use Opus Voice High quality low bit rate remotes 9 6kbps 64kbps Opus Mono Very high quality mono remotes
289. tocececustosatieastatsitecedexeatbecientinreveceetiiersitt 72 20 Lock or Unlock a Program in the Codec ccccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeneeeensesonseeeesnseeenenees 74 21 Locking the Front Panel eisicssiessctsieicchiscededctveeacetietedtentienitetenescceietedecebeeinchineetnevbnavaceaees 74 Part XIX Connecting to the ToolBox Web GUI 76 1 Opening the Web GUI amp LOGIN sirisser aeta aa a ba aaa 76 2 Changing the Default Password sssssusnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 79 Part XX Using the Web GUI 80 1 lt CONTGUEING IP SOUMINGS ossis aa a teal eens 88 2 COMM UFEMGUIS DIN ees eaeectscehaecteeceeteas a ce a eea a aa Lai 91 3 CONNGUIING POTS morii a a E 99 4 Configuring Input Output Settings cccceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeenenseensoeenseeonensonsaseesneasoesnees 105 5 Configure Mono or Stereo Peer to Peer Programs in Merlin cccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 108 6 Configure 2 Mono Peer to Peer Answering Programs in Merlin cccecseeeeeeeeeeeees 117 7 Configure Mono or Stereo IFB Dialing Programs cccccceseeeseceeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeenees 121 8 Configure Mono or Stereo IFB Answering Programs cccssccceseeeeeeeseeenseseeeneeeeenees 133 9 Configure Multicast Client Programs c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnseseeensesnseeseoeens 138 10 COntigure SIP Se ting S saraa Eaa a i 141 11 Configure Peer to Peer SIP Programs ccscc
290. ton to navigate backwards to the Connect SIP screen 5 Press the CONNECT button to make a connection 18 14 Dialing SIP Addresses Dialing a SIP Address via the Codec Front Panel 1 Press the HOME button to return to the Home screen then select Connect gt IP gt SIP and press the button 2 Use the KEYPAD to enter any combination of alphabetic and numeric characters in the SIP address of the codec you want to dial Use the or buttons to enter the periods in the SIP address and use the RETURN button to delete any numbers already entered Alternatively if you have dialed the SIP address previously press the RETURN button to view the Recent Call screen and select the SIP address you want Connect SIP TielineTest2 sip iptel org 3 Press the down Ww navigation button to select Setup and press for then adjust the algorithm jitter buffer encode decode direction port and auto reconnect settings if required 4 Press the RETURN button to navigate backwards to the Connect SIP screen and select Save to name and save the program 5 Press the CONNECT button to make a connection Important Notes e See Configuring SIP Settings for instructions on entering SIP account details into the codec If your codec is registered with same SIP registrar as the destination codec then you only need to enter the SIP user name to dial successfully e f you don t save the program during configuration a temporary program is created after you dial the S
291. trol and Streaming functions if required Ethernet and VLAN interfaces can be configured for e Controlling audio codec control and command only from the Ethernet port e Controlling and Streaming stream audio and control and command the codec wa the Ethernet port e Streaming audio stream audio only from an Ethernet port ETH2 and VLANs only e Nothing Disable the Ethernet port from streaming audio and codec command and control VLANs only Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 s Page s BRA Pa p p i y lt r a Tm lic tll al a ink r I ET eiai r i Se i dein ae F P The name entered into the right hand text box e g Primary or Secondary is an interface identifier used when configuring new programs via the Programs panel IPv4 Address Configuration The codec is capable of automatic DHCP address assignment or manually configured static IPv4 address configuration via the drop down Configure IPv4 menu If you want to ignore IPv4 settings select Off DHCP IP addresses are automatically assigned and can change each time you connect to your Internet Service Provider or to your own local area network LAN By default the codec is programmed for DHCP assigned IP addresses Static IP addresses are fixed addresses that are recommended for studio installations so that IP address dialing remains the same over time for incoming codec connections Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 o
292. ts Dialing and Answering This setting can be Enabled or Disabled If enabled the module will allow audio monitoring of modem tones during connection in POTS Codec mode wa the phone input By default the following phone input monitoring rules apply when multiple POTS G5 modules are installed in a codec and multiple POTS connections are dialed Module 1 Module 2 Audio Rule POTS Codec POTS Codec We phone input receives a mix of modem tone Monitor Modem Tone Monitor Modem Tone jaudio from both modules POTS Codec Analog Phone ie phone input receives analog phone input Monitor Modem Tone audio only and mutes modem tone monitoring Analog Phone Analog Phone Whe phone input accepts audio from the oldest active connection only Important Notes e POTS modem tones will always be audible in the left side of the headphone output irrespective of the type of program loaded in the codec e Modem tone monitoring will work even if Phone Input Enable is Off via Settings gt Audio gt Phone Input gt Phone Input Enable Off e Modem tone monitoring is only enabled during the initial connection training and negotiation period in POTS Codec mode e The monitoring volume can be adjusted via Settings gt Audio gt Phone Input gt Level Country This displays the current country setting in the codec To adjust this setting select Settings gt System gt Country Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 aa Merlin User Manual v 1 4
293. ts in identifying different ISDN services across the network Your Telco must provide a SPID for each B channel you order when connecting over US Nat or US AT amp T networks in the US A SPID is not required when using the AT amp T PTP protocol Typically each ISDN BRI service in the US will have two SPIDs and these must be entered correctly When you enter a SPID into your codec and connect it to an ISDN line an initialization and identification process takes place whereby the terminating equipment your codec sends the SPID to the switch The switch then associates the SPID with a specific Service Profile and directory number Note SPID numbers normally include the phone number and additional prefix or suffix digits up to 20 digits long 12 2 ISDN Answering Configuration Important Note For more detailed information about ISDN Answer Config parameters including bonding and route configuration etc please see the web GUI section of this manual titled Configuring ISDN Answering ISDN Answering Configs are used to determine how codec ISDN modules will behave when answering ISDN calls 1 Press the the SETTINGS button then navigate to Answering and press the button System ih ci Important Note You can also configure your ISDN module by pressing the HOME button to return to the Home screen and select Connect gt ISDN Then use the down w navigation button to select Module Configuration and press the button
294. ttings button when configuration is complete ci Important Notes WD Directory Numbers and Multiple Subscriber Numbers Directory Numbers DN in North America and Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN in the rest of the world are simply phone numbers associated with an ISDN B channel like lines listed in a typical phone directory Your Telco will normally supply 2 DN MSN numbers for each pair of B channels However these numbers may or may not be associated with a specific B channel Often broadcasters prefer to predict which B channel will answer an incoming call to Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 93 ensure audio routing is consistent However if a DN or MSN number is not entered in the codec and multiple B channels are available the codec may use any channel to answer an incoming call To ensure calls are routed consistently enter a DN MSN number without the country or area code as the DN MSN for a B channel then only that corresponding B channel will answer an incoming call to that number Programming DN MSN numbers for each B channel allows the codec to ignore calls without matching DN MSN numbers This is the best way to answer calls from codecs in a predictable manner SPID Numbers in North America ISDN relies on an initialization procedure for associating Service Profiles with specific terminating equipment e g your audio codec rather than lines In the US Telcos assign a Service Profile ID SPID numbe
295. two devices at the remote site This will avoid the first mono or stereo call unloading the Peer to Peer IFB program at the studio and loading a mono or stereo peer to peer program which would cause the second connection to fail Configuring Mono or Stereo Peer to Peer IFB Programs In most situations the studio codec will answer incoming audio stream connections from the remote site The following procedure outlines configuration of an answering program for the studio codec Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 isa Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Important Notes Before you commence program configuration please note The auxiliary input is used by default for the IFB communications channel in Merlin codecs In Merlin PLUS codecs the auxiliary input and XLR input 3 are mixed together by default for 1 x Mono Stereo IFB programs You cannot edit a program when it is currently loaded in the codec e You can lock_a loaded custom program in a codec to ensure the currently loaded program type cannot be unloaded by a codec dialing in with a different program type lf the codec at the studio will receive both mono and stereo peer to peer IFB calls from different remote sites at different times we recommend you configure and load a 1x Stereo Peer to Peer IFB answering program and lock this inthe codec at the studio This will accept both mono and stereo audio stream connections If a codec with a Mono Peer to Peer IFB program calls the studio
296. ual v 1 4 7 Use the numeric KEYPAD to enter the IP address and press to store the setting Note use the or buttons to enter the periods in the IP address and use the RETURN button to delete any numbers already entered ETH1 Enter Pu4 Static Address 172 16 1 2 OK to continue 8 Enter changes to the IPv4 Subnet Subnet Mask or IPv4 Gateway Default Gateway in the same way if they are required check with your network administrator for these settings 9 After all changes have been made use the navgation buttons to scroll to the top of the menu and select Apply Setting then press the OK button to save all changes 10 From the Home screen select Settings gt Unit gt Eth in the codec menus to ensure the new static IP address has been entered correctly Configuring a Static IP Address in Commander G3 and i Mix G3 Codecs To set up a static IP address in Commander G3 and i Mix G3 codecs select Menu gt Configuration gt Advanced gt LAN settings gt IP Setup gt Setup gt Static gt IP Address gt enter IP address gt press OK gt Subnet Mask enter Subnet Mask gt press OK gt Gateway enter Gateway gt press OK gt reboot the codec Record IP Address Details IPv4 Static IP Address IP Address f Subnet Mask f Default Gateway IPv6 Mode Manual Bridge IT Genie and Merlin codecs only P Address IPv6 Prefix Size IPv6 Gateway Getting Connected Once t
297. udio and network redundancy Nee ee na aaa aaa i To eo Overview of this User Manual Use this manual to learn how to e Configure codec programs please read About Program Dialing for more info e Adjust audio and connection settings within the codec Please read Getting Connected Quickly for an overview of how to adjust and store audio and connection settings in your codec using programs Applications Built upon the success of the renowned Commander G3 rack mount codec Merlin delivers high quality bidirectional stereo audio and bidirectional mono IFB communications for remote broadcast connections over LANs WANs the internet and satellite IP It is ideal for studio and remote truck installations and features e High reliability over IP networks without Quality of Service e Powerful audio and data routing e Simple local or remote command and control e Recallable connection programs Codec Features DSP based architecture designed for continuous operation Dual Gigabit 10 100 1000 Ethernet ports with automatic switching for redundancy Auto switching dual redundant AC power supplies Uncompressed PCM audio plus the low delay cascade resilient aptX Enhanced algorithm capable of up to 24bit 48kHz audio sampling e Other popular algorithms including LC AAC HE AAC vi and v2 AAC LD AAC ELD AAC ELDve Opus MPEG 1 Layer Il and Ill Tieline Music and MusicPLUS G 722 and G 7
298. ule settings in Genie Distribution and Merlin PLUS to route incoming calls to specific codec outputs Note Merlin codecs can also be configured to accept 2 ISDN calls from non Tieline codecs and would use similar settings In the following example we will configure two incoming sessionless ISDN audio stream connections Note Genie Distribution and Merlin PLUS support up to 4 sessionless ISDN audio streams connections using 2 ISDN modules and 4 B channels If you want 2 incoming mono ISDN calls to use input outputs 1 and 2 then use answering audio stream connections 1 and 2 in your codec program If you want to use other inputs outputs then simply select the corresponding audio stream e g answering audio streams 5 and 6 will route audio via inputs outputs 5 and 6 So let s get started There are 2 or 3 steps to ensure this is configured correctly depending on whether you want specific incoming calls to always use the same B channels and codec outputs or not Step 1 Configure the Answer Route for the two ISDN Audio Stream answering connections in the codec program Setup two ISDN audio stream answering connections in your program and use the Answer Route setting in the program wizard as displayed in the following image You can use any Answer Route for example Route 1 for ISDN Audio Stream 1 and Route 2 for ISDN Audio Stream 2 The Answer Route number doesn t have to match the audio stream number because the route you select
299. using HE AAC Tieline Music or Tieline Music PLUS AAC HE Codecs include both HE AAC v 1 and HE AAC v 2 which are optimized for low bit rate connections Selection of HE AAC v 1 and v 2 is automatically managed within the codec so only AAC HE is displayed on the screen When used for mono connections HE AAC v 1 performs best at bit rates of 24kbps per channel or higher HE AAC v 1 is also used for stereo connections when audio connection bandwidth is 48kbps or higher HE AAC v 2 is used for stereo connections when audio connection bandwidth is below 48kbps and is capable of delivering 15kHz quality stereo audio at audio bit rates as low as 24kbps A sample rate of 32kHz is used in the codec s default profiles to achieve ultra low bit rate connections but this is adjustable to 44 1kHz or 48kHZz if required Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 172 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 AAC LD AAC LD Low Delay AAC AAC ELD Enhanced Low Delay AAC and AAC ELDv 2 are optimized for low latency real time communication AAC LD is suited to bit rates of 96kbps or higher for stereo audio AAC ELD AAC ELD is optimised for high quality stereo connections from 48 96kbps and performs better at these bit rates when compared with AAC LD AAC ELD v2 For stereo connections below 48kbps AAC ELD v2 will deliver better performance than AAC ELD down to 24kbps Overview of aptX Enhanced Audio Coding aptX Enhanced audio coding is used by thousands of radio sta
300. ut 1 x Stereo Peer to Peer IFB Inputs 1 amp 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 Aux In Aux Out Adjust Auxiliary Output Settings Settings for the auxiliary output audio are adjusted similarly to the HEADPHONE output except that the output level is fixed at line level Configure the front panel HEADPHONE output and rear panel HP AUX output as an Aux Out and then 1 Press the HEADPHONE button to display the aux output adjustment screen 2 Use the left or right gt navigation buttons to adjust the Send Return audio balance Au Dut AuUH Out Line Level k oSend 100 l Return 0 3 Press when you have finished Note Send Return balance can also be adjusted by pressing the SETTINGS button navigate to Audio and then Aux Bal and press or Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 32 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 11 Inserting Hardware Modules Two slots are available for inserting optional ISDN or POTS connection modules into the codec The module slots are numbered as follows Inserting or Removing a Module Ensure the codec is not powered up when inserting or removing modules Where possible A use anti static precautions to help minimize the chance of static charges damaging the highly sensitive circuitry Do not force a module into the codec Modules should be installed slowly and gently 1 Remove power from the codec and then remove the 4 screws from the blanking panel or module installed in the codec Carefully slide the new module i
301. utput Sync Input BNC type SYNC INPUT for attaching Word Clock sync to the codec Command amp Control Interfaces 1 Four relay inputs and four opto isolated outputs for machine control va the DB15 CONTROL PORT IN OUT connector 2 A nine pin female RS 232 serial connection for local and remote control of equipment at either Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 12 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 end of the link Dual Redundant AC Power Inputs The codec is powered by dual 100 240 volt redundant AC power supplies which use standard IEC connectors Dual Module Slots Two additional module slots for inserting optional POTS or ISDN modules Supplementary Ground Terminal Supplementary ground terminal for connecting the unit to a ground connection See Warnings and Safety Information for more details Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 6 Merlin Front Panel Controls The hardware front panel interface features menu navigation buttons an LCD display with PPM metering and a dialing keypad LCD Menu Return to Main Screen Screen Button Selector Alarm LED Programmable User LED Information Button USB Host Port 6 x PPM Meters 6 35 mm Disconnect Dialing Headphone Stereo Headphone Out Button Settings Button Keypad Level Adjust Balanced Line Out Connection Confirmation Power Functions f Connect Configuration LED Buttons Codec Reset Button s LED
302. ved Additional clause All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors o Portions Copyright c 2004 Masarykova universita Masaryk University Brno Czech Republic All rights reserved o Portions Copyright c 1997 2003 Kungliga Tekniska H gskolan Royal Institute of Technology Stockholm Sweden All rights reserved o Portions 2 clause BSD license 3rd clause removed Copyright c 1998 Doug Rabson All rights reserved o Portions Copyright c 2002 Rice University All rights reserved o Portions Copyright 2000 Aaron D Gifford All rights reserved o Portions 2 clause BSD license 3rd clause removed Copyright c 1998 Doug Rabson Copyright c 2001 Jake Burkholder All rights reserved o Portions Copyright C 1995 1996 1997 and 1998 WIDE Project ALL rights reserved o Portions Copyright c 2000 2002 Japan Network Information Center All rights reserved o idnkit Copyright c 2000 2002 Japan Network Information Center All rights reserved o zkt Copyright c 2005 2008 Holger Zuleger HZnet All rights reserved e dhcpcd 2 clause BSD license clause 3 removed o Copyright c 2006 2011 Roy Marples lt roy marples name gt Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 224 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 e eventlog o Copyright c 2003 BalaBit I
303. via user logs which can either be sent to Tieline support or downloaded for user diagnostics Procedure for Sending Logs to Tieline 1 Open the web GUI and click the Help symbol at the top of the screen to display the Help panel 2 Click Download Logs Support Logs Download Logs 3 Save the file to your computer and then send it as a zip file to Tieline support via Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 20 22 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 157 support tieline com Download Event Logs Event logs can be downloaded from the codec and viewed using any text editor e g Microsoft Word 1 Open the web GUI and click the Help symbol at the top of the screen to display the Help panel 2 Click Download Event Log and select a location to save the log file Event Log TT Download Event Log Sa aE T te Clearing Logs This option should only be used if instructed to by Tieline support staff To clear all event and other logs in the codec wa the front panel see the Reset_and Restore Factory Default Settings section of this manual or see Reset Factory Default Settings to clear recent log history using the web GUI Configuring Alarms Click the Alarm symbol 2 at the top of the web GUI to view and configure a range of alarms which can provide alerts as required Alarm Types Click Alarm Types to display the alarm overview pane within the Alarms Panel Naa FAIC
304. will associate the incoming call with a corresponding Answer Route configured in the answering codec program e g Answer Route 1 E More detailed information about how to configure the codec to answer and route multiple sessionless ISDN calls is available in Using ISDN Answer Routes for Sessionless ISDN Calls This uses examples to explain how to set up consistent deterministic routing of multiple incoming sessionless calls Answering both Tieline Session and Sessionless ISDN Calls Leave the Sessionless Only checkbox in the ISDN Answering Config unchecked if the codec is expected to receive ISDN calls from Tieline codecs or both Tieline and non Tieline codecs i e you are not sure which type of codec may call In this mode when the codec answers a call it initially expects to receive Tieline session data from the dialing codec and configure its own algorithm settings according to that If it fails to receive Tieline session data within 5 seconds i e a non Tieline codec is calling or a Tieline codec with session data disabled it will use the settings in the ISDN Answering Config instead The following image displays how the answering codec will behave in this mode when receiving calls from both Tieline and non Tieline codecs Remote Codec with ISDN dials using a Program with Tieline Session Data Enabled TTT Com Algorithm amp Dial Route info sent used to determine B channel allocation
305. will be used by the incoming ISDN call This is similar to how an extension number is used to route a phone call Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 217 Step 2 Configure the ISDN Module to accept two sessionless ISDN calls This can be configured via Settings gt Modules or use the Toolbox web GUI via Settings panel gt Modules 1 Select Config 1 and Ignore Session and Route 1 Select your preferred algorithm then click Save Settings This means that Module 1 B channel 1 will answer a sessionless ISDN call using these settings ki Me ea Se Sa ee Ss r ees gee Se SH S mm P Network Options Audio SIP T Modules Config Config3 Config 4 Default Save settings ar a e a tarat q F Reyer 2 Next select Config 2 and Ignore Session and Route 2 Select your preferred algorithm then click Save Settings This means that Module 1 B channel 2 will answer a sessionless ISDN call using these settings Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 as Merlin User Manual v 1 4 Eaa tanned o ae i SECI a Tag A a Mat Mas Hl hey e ip J k Network Options Audio SIP Modules Configi Config3 Config4 Default l SS a jonded of Unbonded Bonded Only Save setings Both ISDN B channels can now answer incoming sessionless ISDN calls If it doesn t matter which incoming codec call is answered by which B c
306. with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
307. within half a second This response is linear To adjust this setting in the codec 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Navigate to Audio and press or 3 Navigate to Input IGC and press or 4 Select the channel you want to adjust and press or 5 Navigate to the preferred setting and press for Configure Audio Reference Metering when Connecting to Tieline G3 Codecs New generation Genie Merlin and Bridge IT IP codecs have more audio headroom than Tieline G3 audio codecs therefore the audio metering reference scale needs to be adjusted when connecting to a Commander or i Mix G3 codec with one of these codecs The G3 metering scale is between 11dBu and 18dBu Tieline codecs perform this metering adjustment automatically when they connect to each other or this can be programmed to occur by default 1 Press the SETTINGS button 2 Navigate to Audio and press or 3 Navigate to Ref Level and press ox 4 Select Tieline G3 and press or Audio levels should average around the nominal Ow point and audio peaks should not exceed 16dbu as indicated by the PPM meter Tieline Pty Ltd 2014 Merlin User Manual v 1 4 _ Features Description _ O OOO O 1 11dBu PPM meter low point 2 4dBu Nominal Ow reference level at 4dBu 3 16dBu 16 indication where audio will clip distort D Important Note If your codec Genie Distribution and Bridge IT supports sending multi unicast Connections and the Auto d

Merlin User Manual v.1.4

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents